JP2016209477A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which appropriately displays diversifying performance images.SOLUTION: The game machine which executes a game has performance execution means for executing a performance by using performance images. The performance execution means is capable of executing a linkage performance in which a linkage image to be displayed, being linked with the operation of a movable body, is used and a non-linkage performance in which a non-linkage image to be displayed, not being linked with the operation of the movable body is used. The priority order of the image display is set higher for the linkage images than for the non-linkage images.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 27

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are given to players. In addition, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is established). There are some which are configured to be able to be controlled to an advantageous state such as a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result.

  As a gaming machine as described above, there is known a gaming machine that displays an image of a decorative pattern and a character image in accordance with a predetermined priority order (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-13477 A

  However, there is a possibility that diversified effect images cannot be displayed appropriately.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying diversified effect images.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine that performs a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or the like), and an effect image (for example, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, various execution images shown in FIG. 48, etc.) for performing the production (for example, a group notice production operation control process in step S545 and an accessory operation control process in step S546). The effect execution means uses an interlocking effect (for example, an effect effect effect or the like) using an interlocking image (for example, an effect effect effect image or the like) displayed in conjunction with an operation of a movable body (the movable accessory 17 or the like). And an unlinked effect (for example, a group notice effect) using a non-linked image (for example, a group notice effect image, etc.) displayed without being linked to the operation of the movable body can be executed. Image table compared to linked images (For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the accessory effect effect image with the Z value “4” is displayed on the front side of the group notice effect image with the Z value “6”. ).

  According to the said structure, the diversified effect image can be displayed suitably.

(2) In addition, the gaming machine described in (1) above is a notification means (for example, error notification in step S75) that performs notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28 or the like). The notification means can notify an error using an error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28), and the error notification image is displayed as an image compared with the effect image. (For example, as shown in FIG. 30, an error notification image with a Z value “0” is displayed on the front side of an effect effect effect image with a Z value “4”, for example). ).

  According to the said structure, an effect image can be displayed suitably.

(3) In addition, the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) described above is a notification means (for example, a notification device) that performs notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28 or the like). When the specific effect (for example, step 5 (SU5) of the step-up notice effect, the group notice effect, the accessory effect, etc.) is executed. The fact that the specific effect has been executed can be notified using an information image (for example, an effect execution notification image or the like), and the information image has a high priority (for example, as shown in FIG. 30). Z values “1” to “3” are set in the effect execution notification image).

  According to the said structure, the visibility of an information image can be improved.

(4) Also, in the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the effect executing means displays in conjunction with the operation of the first movable body (for example, movable body A). The second interlocking image displayed in conjunction with the first interlocking effect using the first interlocking image (for example, the effect effect effect image a) and the operation of the second movable member (for example, the movable member B). (For example, the second interlocking effect using the accessory effect effect image b) can be executed, and the first interlocking image may be set with a different priority from the second interlocking image ( For example, different Z values may be set for the accessory effect effect image a and the accessory effect effect image b).

  According to the said structure, an effect image can be displayed suitably.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above, the first linked image may have the same priority as the second linked image (for example, as described above, The same Z value may be set for the effect effect effect image a and the effect effect effect image b).

  According to the said structure, an effect image can be displayed suitably.

(6) In addition, the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) described above includes variable display means (for example, in a variable display start setting process) that performs variable display of identification information (for example, decorative symbols). A process of setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern as a use pattern (step S532), a process of variably displaying decorative symbols based on the effect control pattern set in the variable display effect process (step S542), etc. The effect executing means is predetermined as an effect for notifying whether the variable winning device (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 6B) is controlled in a state where the game medium is easy to win (for example, the high base state). A predetermined effect (for example, a predetermined performance executed in the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 46) using an effect image (for example, the predetermined effect image in FIG. 48B). Etc.), and the predetermined effect image is set to have a higher priority for image display than the identification information at least for a predetermined period during variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 48C) During the variable display of the symbol, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a layer higher than the decorative symbol), and the priority of the image display is set lower than the identification information at least during the predetermined period during the stop display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 48D, during the stop display of the decorative design, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a lower layer than the decorative design).

  According to the said structure, an effect image can be displayed suitably.

(7) In addition, the gaming machine described in any of (1) to (6) above uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIGS. 28, 49, 53, etc.). Informing means (for example, a prize ball number informing operation control process in step S573, a cumulative prize ball number informing operation control process in step S574, etc.) for informing is provided, and the informing means includes a first value informing image (for example, The value (for example, the number of winning balls for the jackpot) acquired in a specific period (the winning game state for each time) using the prize ball number notification image, etc., and the second value notification image (for example, cumulative prize ball) (For example, a jackpot game state that is continuously changing without entering a normal state) using a number notification image or the like, for example, a cumulative prize ball for a jackpot in a continuous game Number etc.) and the first A different priority order may be set for the value notification image and the second value notification image (for example, as shown in FIG. 49D, the award ball number notification image includes the cumulative prize ball number notification). Z value different from the image is set).

  According to the said structure, a some alerting | reporting effect can be performed suitably.

(8) In addition, the gaming machine described in any of (1) to (7) above uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIGS. 28, 49, 53, etc.). Informing means (for example, an error notifying process in step S75, a prize ball number notifying operation control process in step S573, a cumulative prize ball number notifying operation control process in step S574, etc.) for notifying, and the notifying means, An error using an error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28) and a value acquired using a value notification image (for example, a prize ball number notification image, a cumulative prize ball number notification image, etc.) (for example, , The number of prize balls, etc.) can be notified, and different priority orders may be set for the error notification image and the value notification image (for example, as shown in FIG. 49D). In the error notification image, It sets different Z values from the image and the cumulative prize cell count notification image).

  According to the said structure, a some alerting | reporting effect can be performed suitably.

(9) Further, the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIGS. 28, 49, 53, etc.). Informing means (for example, an error informing process in step S75, a probability change confirmation informing operation control process in step S575, etc.) for informing is provided, and the informing means includes an error informing image (for example, the error informing image shown in FIG. 28). Etc.) and an error notification state (for example, a probability change confirmation notification image shown in FIG. 53, an image for notification of becoming a high base, an image for notification of reference to a specific variation pattern table, etc.) ) Can be used to notify the state (for example, the fact that it is controlled to a probable change state after the end of the big hit gaming state or the fact that it is controlled to the high base state etc. after the end of the big hit gaming state), and an error notification image And state A priority order different from that of the knowledge image may be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 53B, the error notification image is set with a Z value different from that of the probability change confirmation notification image). )

  According to the said structure, a some alerting | reporting effect can be performed suitably.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a fluctuation category and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sensor error alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a prefetch determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error alerting | reporting process. It is a figure which shows an example of Z value etc. of various images. It is a figure which shows an example of various images. It is a figure which shows an example of various images. It is the conceptual diagram which represented the layer of various images typically. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing explaining production determination processing, such as holding. It is explanatory drawing explaining production patterns etc., such as holding. It is explanatory drawing explaining a chance zone effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio etc. of the execution presence or absence of the main notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a chance zone effect operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example, such as group notice effect operation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect execution alerting | reporting operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the waiting process per special figure. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the predetermined | prescribed effect process which performs the predetermined | prescribed effect related to opening | releasing of a normal variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio, such as the presence or absence of execution of a predetermined effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining predetermined production | generation action control processing etc. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the Z value etc. of another image. It is the conceptual diagram etc. which represented the layer of various images typically. It is the conceptual diagram etc. which represented the layer of various images typically. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a figure which shows an example of the Z value etc. of another image. It is the conceptual diagram etc. which represented the layer of various images typically.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed. When there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening, they are simply referred to as “start winning opening”.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter.

  In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. As described above, the second start winning port as the second start area includes an expanded open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and a normal open state in which the game ball hardly passes (enters) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. The detection by the switches (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Of the “winnings”, a winning at the starting winning port (first starting winning port or second starting winning port) is referred to as a “starting winning”, and in particular, a winning at the first starting winning port is referred to as a first starting prize. The winning at the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  Based on the occurrence of the first start winning (detection of game balls by the first start port switch 22A), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls and the first special figure holding memory number (to be described later) ) Is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), a decorative symbol executed in the first special symbol game (described later) or the image display device 5 (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 4A. A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display is established.

  Further, based on the occurrence of the second start winning (detection of game balls by the second start port switch 22B), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number If (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), it is executed in the second special symbol game (described later) or the image display device 5 (described later) executed in the second special symbol display device 4B. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display of decorative symbols is established. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second start prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

  The first special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the first start winning and are temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) and the variable display of the decorative symbols is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start prize is generated. When the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, the fact that the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established previously is being executed, When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in a waiting state. The number of first special figure holding memory decreases by one every time one first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the first start condition by a certain first start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start winning in which the first start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the first starting winning is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure hold information is digested one by one every time the first start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the digested first special figure hold information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning occurs but are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start prize for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of the decorative symbols is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start prize, the second start prize is generated. If the second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, that the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established previously is being executed, When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the waiting state for execution. The number of second special figure reservation storage decreases by one every time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start prize which does not satisfy the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd start prize Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until a second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the second special figure hold information that has been put on hold is digested one by one every time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the second special figure hold information that is digested is executed.

  In addition, the reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is referred to as a “total reserved memory number”. In the case where the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number” or “hold memory number”. That is, when simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number” or “hold memory number”, one or two of the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number Or it may refer to three. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition”. The first special figure hold information and the second special figure hold information are also simply referred to as “special figure hold information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the gaming area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 forms a big winning opening that changes between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes, for example, a grand prize opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door shown in FIG. (Open state, closed state) is changed.

  As an example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 closes the grand prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, closes the big prize opening, and opens the big prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the on state. Open the grand prize opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) through the open winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. In other words, winning the prize winning opening occurs by opening the winning prize opening.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the occurrence of winning in the big prize opening (detection of game balls by the count switch 23). The number of winning balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening is the number of winning balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first starting winning, and the second starting winning is More than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, 3). That is, it greatly affects whether the state of the special winning opening (open state, closed state) is advantageous to the player. That is, when the grand prize opening is in an open state, more prize balls can be expected than when the grand prize opening is in a closed state. Therefore, when the big prize opening is in an open state, Is very advantageous to the player.

  In addition to or in place of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter), a partially open state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) may be provided.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol” or “special symbol 1”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. (Special figure) is also referred to as “second special figure” or “special figure 2”. A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to each special symbol. As an example, each number indicating “0” to “9” is assigned with a symbol number “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number “10”. That's fine. Note that the special symbols are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E in the alphabet) in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in a 7-segment LED are set in advance, as a special design It may be displayed.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (upper portions of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). . The first hold indicator 25A includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). A first on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the first special figure game is established by the establishment of a new first start condition. When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one. As described above, the expression “first hold display” is based on the operation based on the first special figure hold information (lighting control of the LED of the first hold indicator 25A and the first start winning storage display area 5HL (described later). In addition to indicating display control), the display itself based on the first special figure hold information (display by the LED of the first hold indicator 25A, display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL (described later)) There is also. For example, the first hold display when the first hold display is newly added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL (described later) indicates the newly added display itself. The same applies to “second hold display” and “active display” (described later).

  The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new second starting condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the second special figure game is held by the establishment of a new second starting condition When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  Note that when there is no particular distinction between the first hold display and the second hold display, they are also simply referred to as “hold display”.

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general figure hold display device 25 </ b> C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of common figure reservations (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the normal symbol display 20 A normal start condition for executing a general game (to be described later) executed at the above is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 displays (variably displays) variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”), which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Note that a variable display game that variably displays a normal symbol is also referred to as a general game (or “normal game”). Note that information about a general game in which a general chart start condition is satisfied but a general chart start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as on-hold data (general map hold information).

  The general figure hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general figure hold storage number based on the hold data (general hold information) by, for example, the number of LEDs to be lit. The number of stored customary figures is the number of usual-purpose games that are temporarily executed without being executed immediately when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the general chart start condition for executing the general game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the general chart start condition for allowing the start of the general game is not satisfied ( For example, if the previously established ordinary game is being executed), the execution of the ordinary game is put on hold (the ordinary game is waiting to be executed). In other words, the number of usual-pending memories is the number of usual-purpose games that are in a waiting state. The number of stored ordinary maps is decremented by 1 each time one of the ordinary diagram start conditions is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified, are variably displayed. The variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special symbol game (a special game using the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special game using the second special diagram), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. A decorative symbol display corresponding to the start of a special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game), that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special figure (first special figure or second special figure) In each of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a change in decorative design (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special symbol game, that is, in response to the special symbol stop display, the decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols, final symbols) that are variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. Stop symbol) is also displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the ornamental symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special symbol game (or the second special symbol game). Then, the fixed decoration symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5L is also referred to as the left symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5C is also referred to as the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5R is also referred to as the right symbol.

  The decorative design is composed of, for example, 8 types of designs (alphanumeric characters, Chinese numerals, English characters, figures, character images related to a predetermined motif, etc.). Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each decorative symbol. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be assigned to the decorative symbols of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and any number may be used (for example, seven or nine).

  In addition, the stop display which stops the fixed special symbol which is a variable symbol display result (also referred to as a special symbol display result) and terminates the variable display, and the fixed symbol symbol which is a variable symbol display result (final stop) Stop display to stop the variable display and stop display to stop the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as the normal figure display result) Also referred to as a complete stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). Note that the variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily coincide with the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time of the special symbol (special symbol variation time) As long as the fluctuation time is within.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (the stop display timing of the confirmed special symbol) It may be later than (stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped, and the final special symbol may be stopped and displayed when the execution of the predetermined effect is completed.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, there is a case where temporary stop display is performed in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started until the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined effect (for example, a slip effect (described later), a pseudo-continuous effect (described later), a re-lottery effect (described later), or the like) is performed, a temporary stop display of a decorative design is performed. In addition, the temporary stop display of the decorative design may be performed as a part of the predetermined performance, or the temporary stop display of the decorative design may be performed with the execution of the predetermined performance. In other words, the temporary stop display of the decorative design may be considered as a part of the predetermined effect, or may be considered as a different thing from the predetermined effect. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern with a fluctuation speed of “0” is displayed while being stopped, for example, causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). This includes things that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first start prize storage display area 5HL and a second start prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the first hold indicator 25A, the first hold display for displaying the first special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the second hold indicator 25B, the second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. In other words, the number of second special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. In other words, when the number of holds of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, the first start prize storage display A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold information on the right side of the area 5HL (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the first start winning storage display area 5HL If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (the left side of the leftmost first hold display if there are a plurality of other first hold displays). You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, and the number of holds of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduced amount is displayed. Delete the first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second hold display may be performed, for example, left-justified. That is, when the number of second special figure games held increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second start win memory display area 5HR, the second start win memory display A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second hold display, the new second hold is displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (or on the right side of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays). You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, if the number of holds in the second special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second reduced amount is stored. Delete the second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side).

  Note that the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR are also simply referred to as “start prize storage display area 5H” unless otherwise distinguished.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, an active display area (also referred to as a current display area, an active hold display area, a digestion display area, etc.) AHA is arranged. In the active display area, an active display (also referred to as a digestion display, a current display, etc.) is displayed based on the fact that the hold display is erased from the start winning memory display area 5H when the start condition is satisfied. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold display displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning storage display area 5HL is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA to display the active display, and the second start When the condition is satisfied, the second hold display displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning storage display area 5HR is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA, and the active display is displayed. The display mode of the hold display immediately before moving (shifting) to the active display area AHA and the display mode of the active display immediately after moving (shifting) to the active display area AHA may be different. That is, the display mode may change when shifting to the active display. Hereinafter, an active display that is displayed based on the fact that a certain hold display M is deleted may be referred to as an active display corresponding to the hold display M. That is, “corresponding” in the “active display corresponding to the hold display” means that the active display takes over at least a part of the hold display when the variable display such as a decorative design is started by the disappearance of the hold display. Or a display similar to the hold display (for example, when the same character is drawn).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR as shown in FIG. The active display area AHA only needs to be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5.

  In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered any of the general prize opening is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower pan main body or the like below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the game progress status of the gaming machine 1 and outputs a warning sound according to the status of the gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, etc. that are output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, voice (serif, message), or the like that is output in accordance with a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of a winning at the first start winning opening, etc.). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the production sound is, for example, a sound or voice that is notified to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound, voice, or the like that notifies the shift to the reach state when the reach state (described later) is shifted. Sound, voice, or the like that notifies or suggests that the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound that is output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound that is output when the glass door (not shown) is open, or the like. .

  A movable accessory (movable body) that operates as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the upper position of the image display device 5 is changed from the first position (initial position shown in FIG. 1) to the second position (lower end position, for example, the position of the front surface of the display area of the image display device 5). A movable accessory 17 is provided that can move up to a distance.

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed on the movable accessory 17, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed on the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is placed on the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. 9U, the light emitting member 9SL and the light emitting member 9SR are installed on the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless particularly distinguished. For example, the lamp 9 may be composed of one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) in the game area.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the movable accessory 17 described above are effects devices that perform effects. However, the gaming machine 1 may have other effects such as a device having a vibration unit and a device having a blower. An apparatus may be provided.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at other positions. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the regular game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the change of the normal symbol is started), the fixed normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol after a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time has elapsed. Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special game (first special game) is started by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. A special game (second special game) is started by the second special symbol display device 4B on the basis that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the change of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the fixed special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol Derives and displays a symbol (special image display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, “ It will be “losing”. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the “small hit” as the predetermined display result may be used.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is a specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 controls the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the open state in the big hit gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the big prize opening is controlled to be in an open state is an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the variable display result in the special game is “small hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines a round (also referred to as “round game”) that is advantageous to the player in the big hit gaming state after the variable display result in the special figure game is “big hit”. Is executed (number of rounds). The round is the opening cycle of the big prize opening. In each round (each round), the pachinko gaming machine 1 opens and closes the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to change the state of the big winning opening (open state, closed state). For example, the pachinko machine 1 opens the grand prize opening door at the start of the round, changes the grand prize opening from the closed state to the open state, maintains the grand prize opening in the open state, and then closes the grand prize opening door. The grand opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, and one round is completed.

  In addition, it is not an aspect in which the grand prize opening door is immediately opened at the start of the round and the grand prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state, but the grand prize opening door is closed at the start of the round without immediately opening the grand prize opening door. It is good also as an aspect which opens and closes a big winning opening door and changes a big winning opening from a closed state to an open state after that. Also, it is not an aspect that closes the grand prize opening door at the end of the round and changes the grand prize opening from the open state to the closed state, but closes the prize opening door and changes the grand prize opening from the open state to the closed state. It is good also as an aspect which is maintained to and finishes a round after that.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening to the open state once per round (changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state during one round). In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the big prize opening to the open state a plurality of times per round. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the grand prize opening to an open state twice per round (during the round, the grand prize opening is open → closed → open → closed) May change with the state).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 repeatedly executes rounds in the jackpot gaming state until the number of rounds reaches a predetermined upper limit. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the round even if the number of executions of the round has not reached the predetermined maximum number of times, because the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball has not won the big prize opening). May be terminated.

  Note that the predetermined upper limit number of times may be one type (for example, always 10 times) or a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined maximum number of times may be any number selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 2, 8, and 16 times).

  In the round, the condition of whether the predetermined winning opening time has elapsed after opening the large winning opening door or whether a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winnings to the large winning opening occurs or not is determined. It is kept open until established. The predetermined upper limit opening time may be one type (for example, always 29 seconds) or a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined upper limit opening time may be any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 0.1 seconds and 29 seconds).

  In the round, the big prize opening is maintained in a closed state (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case of a mode in which the round starts with the grand prize opening being changed from the closed state to the open state, the grand prize opening is until a predetermined time (closing period) has elapsed after the grand prize opening door is closed. Stay closed for a period of time. Further, for example, in the case of a mode in which a round starts with the grand prize opening maintained in a closed state, the big prize opening is in a closed state for a period until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the round starts. Maintained. The predetermined time (closing period) may be one type (for example, always 3 seconds) or may be a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined time (closing period) may be any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of time (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds).

  From the above, in the big hit gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes, for example, each round of changing the big prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds), or opens the big prize opening. Each round of changing from state (29 seconds) to closed state (3 seconds) is executed 16 times, or the grand prize opening is opened (0.1 seconds) → closed state (1 second) → open state (0.1 Each round that is changed from (second) to closed state (one second) can be executed twice. Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the big hit gaming state performs the round of changing the grand prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds) eight times and then opens the big prize port (0. It is also possible to execute each round changing from 1 second) to closed state (1 second) eight times.

  Of rounds in the big hit gaming state, a round whose upper limit opening time is relatively long (for example, a round whose opening state is 29 seconds) is also called a normal opening round, and a round whose upper limit opening time is relatively short (for example, opening) A round whose state is 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  In addition, among special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the normal opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the normal opening round jackpot symbol. . Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the short-term opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the short-term opening round jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state (normal open big hit state) controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the normal open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Also, in the big hit gaming state (short term open big hit state) controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as a definite special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). The If the number of executions of the normal opening round is larger in the normal opening big hit state than the short opening big hit state, the short opening is executed in addition to the normal opening round in the normal opening big hit state. In the big hit state, a normal opening round may be executed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the value obtained by the player in each jackpot game state as the jackpot game state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, that is, the game It is possible to prepare (realize) various jackpot gaming states with different degrees of advantage (for example, the number of winning balls (number of balls)) viewed from the player.

  As an example of the case where the short-term free round is not used, the round is advantageous to the player over the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times and the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times. A jackpot gaming state in which (normally open round) is executed 16 times can be prepared. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times that the winning prize opening is changed to the open state in each round (normally open round) or the time (open time) of each open state, the round (normally open round) is determined. In the big hit gaming state executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls as the big hit gaming state executed eight times (normally open round).

  As an example of using short-term open rounds, a jackpot gaming state (actually eight rounds of jackpot gaming state) in which eight short-term open rounds are executed after executing eight regular opening rounds, and a bonus game state of substantial eight rounds. It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state in which a normal open round is executed 16 times, which is advantageous to the player. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times that the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each normal open round, and the time (open time) of each open state, and the number of items that can be obtained in the short-term open round If it is so small as to be negligible, in the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect a double hit in the big hit gaming state of the actual eight rounds.

  In addition, even if the upper limit opening time has not elapsed after opening the grand prize opening door, if a predetermined number of winnings are made to the big prize opening, the grand prize opening will change from the open state to the closed state. The value obtained by the player may be made different by providing a difference in the predetermined number. For example, a big hit gaming state in which the above-mentioned predetermined number is set to 5 and the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) is executed 8 times, and the normal opening round (the opening time is 29 seconds) is set to 8 above. A jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds), in which the predetermined number is 10, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot gaming state to be executed once, may be prepared.

  Further, the value obtained by the player may be made different by providing a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening. For example, it is more advantageous for the player than the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times and the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times. A big hit gaming state in which a normal open round with 12 award balls is executed 16 times may be prepared.

  Further, in addition to the value obtained by the player by the jackpot gaming state itself (value obtained by the player during the jackpot gaming state), the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state, The value obtained by the player after the jackpot gaming state by changing the length of the period (for example, the number of short times and ST times) in which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state is maintained May be different.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled after the 8R probability variable big hit (described later) is set as the big hit gaming state that is controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. A big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed 8 times and a big hit gaming state in which the normal open round controlled after the 16R probability variable big hit (described later) is executed 16 times are prepared.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of one of the special game games, the decorative display variable display is started. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state is a decorative design that is not yet stopped when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as “reach variation”). Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching a reach state is also referred to as reach establishment (reach establishment).

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the variation pattern of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8, the light emission operation of the lamp 9 (extinguishing, blinking, lighting, etc.), and the operation of the movable accessory 17 (stationary, It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode before entering the reach state.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production may be varied (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”). As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which one of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect appears. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach that has a higher expectation degree of big hits than normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  Note that the expected degree of jackpot for a certain performance is, for example, (probability that the performance will be executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of being a big hit) / {(probability of that performance being executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of becoming a big hit) + (Probability that the effect will be executed at times other than the jackpot) × (Probability that the jackpot will not be hit)}. In addition, when a certain effect is executed and “big hit” is always obtained, the big hit expectation degree of the effect is “1”. The same applies to the degree of expectation of super reach by a certain production.

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, a slide effect or a pseudo-continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative design or the like can be executed as one aspect of the variable display effect. The sliding effect is an effect in which a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then the decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped is displayed again in a special game. Or, it is an effect in which a part of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed again. According to the slip effect, the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed can be changed to another symbol, so that, for example, it can be shown that the non-reach state is changed to the reach state.

  Pseudo-continuous effect is a variable display of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and then temporarily displayed in some or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in one special game. It is a production to make. The re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect can be performed a plurality of times (for example, a maximum of 4 times) for one special figure game.

  The number of re-variable displays (number of re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous effect is the number of variable displays (first variable display) until all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the first time in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R ( 1), the number of re-variable displays (final variable display) after all decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped (last time), and the number X of re-variable displays between the first variable display and the last variable display ( X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) less than the number of times (X + 2) obtained by adding together. The number of re-variable display times is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (the number of temporary stops). In addition, the number of re-variable displays in the pseudo-continuous production is also referred to as pseudo-continuous number (or pseudo-continuous fluctuation number). That is, the number of pseudo continuous operations, the number of re-variable display times, and the number of temporary stops are the same. Note that the increase in the number of times of the pseudo ream, such as the first time, the second time, the third time,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo ream continues”.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once to four times, so that the decoration pattern is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it were started 2-5 times in a row. In this embodiment, an example in which the revariable display (revariation) is performed once or twice (see FIG. 5) is shown, but the revariable display (revariation) may be performed three or more times.

  The pseudo-continuous effect may be performed before the reach is established, or may be performed after the reach is established. That is, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the temporary stop display may be performed before the reach state is reached, or the temporary stop display may be performed after the reach state is reached.

  The slip effect (similar to the pseudo-ream effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect will be executed or that the expectation level of the big hit is high. Also good. In the following, there is a case in which any one of the reach effects or a certain reach effect is likely to be executed or the effect that predicts or suggests to the player that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high is collectively referred to as the notice effect.

  Note that a variable display effect (variable display operation) different from the slip effect and the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed as the notice effect. For example, change start timing (for example, when the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol start changing at the same time, start timing at the same time, or when the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol do not start changing at the same time. For the first time the symbol that starts to change is the timing at which the change starts, etc.) and the effect that makes the change start order of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol different from the normal time May be executed as In addition, a display operation other than the variable display operation may be executed as a notice effect. For example, an effect that makes the background image different from the normal time or an effect that makes the hold display different from the normal time may be executed as the notice effect. The notice effect may be due to an operation other than the display operation. For example, the notice effect may be based on sound output from the speaker 8, light emission from the lamp 9, operation of the movable accessory 17, and the like.

  Note that the notification (notification or suggestion) by the notice effect may be performed before the player recognizes whether or not the notice content is realized. For example, the notice effect that notifies the possibility of reaching the reach state may be performed before the reach state (or the non-reach state) is entered. In addition, the notice effect that notifies the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” may be performed before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  It is sufficient for the notice effect to include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-judgment notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special-purpose game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as the target hold information, the hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is displayed. Also referred to as target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when the target hold information including the variable display of the target is being digested) and before the target hold information. There are a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information and a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information of the target and during the digestion of the hold information before the target hold information.

  In addition, as the pre-reading notice effect, a hold effect may be prepared according to the display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second hold display in the second start prize win memory display area 5HR. The holding effect includes a first hold display added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL when the first start winning occurs, and a second hold display added to the second start winning memory display area 5HR when the second start winning occurs. Are displayed in a notice mode (addition effect at the time of addition), and the already displayed first hold display and second hold display are changed to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode). , And the like), an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display changes to the notice mode, and the character or the like is directly displayed on the display in the display area of the image display device 5. Effect that is acted on or indirectly (holding action effect), or an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and the character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 on hold Shown directly or indirectly effect to act on (hold action Gase effect) may be included, such as. When the hold action effect is executed, the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display) that is the target of action changes, but when the hold action effect effect is executed, the first hold display (or The display mode of (second hold display) does not change.

  Moreover, the active display effect by the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA may be prepared as the notice effect. In the active display effect, an active display to be added to the active display area AHA is displayed in a notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition), or an already displayed active display is changed to a notice mode (from a certain notice mode to another This includes an effect to change to the notice mode (the same applies hereinafter) (active display change effect) and an effect to be executed when the active display changes to the notice mode, and activates a character or the like in the display area of the image display device 5. An effect that directly or indirectly acts on the display (active display effect), or an effect that is executed when the active display does not change to the notice mode, and displays characters and the like in the display area of the image display device 5 as active display Includes direct or indirect effects (active display effects) Good. Note that when the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display that is the target of action changes, but when the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display does not change.

  The display mode of the active display in the active display effect may be determined before the change (for example, at the time of starting winning) or may be determined at the time of the change. Further, the hold effect and the active display effect may be collectively referred to as a hold effect.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In the present embodiment, a special symbol indicating the number “3” among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7”) as the big hit symbol as the confirmed special symbols in the special symbol game. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, “8R probability variation big hit”, which is one mode of “big hit”, is set. Further, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, “16R probability variable big hit” which is one mode of “big hit” is obtained. The round controlled when the 8R probability variation big hit is reached or the 16R probability variation big hit is a normally open round. In other words, in the present embodiment, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are normal open round jackpot symbols.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, it is 8R probability variation big hit, but when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed. It may be set to “2R probability variation big hit (also referred to as“ surprise accuracy ”)” in which a short-term opening round is executed. In this case, the special symbol indicating the number “5” is a short-term open round jackpot symbol (also referred to as a random symbol). In the “big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, “16R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” are called “big hit types”.

  In the case of 16R probable big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the reach state is reached, and a predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, the definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is the same decorative pattern having an odd number of symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line on the side) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Are arranged in three rows (ie, “1”, “1”, “1”, “3”, “3”, “3”, “5”, “5”, “ 5 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”).

  In the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “3” or “5” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the reach state is reached. After the reach effect is executed, the confirmed decorative symbol that is the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is a pattern in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In other words, “2”, “2”, “2”, “4”, “4”, “4”, “6”, “6”, “6”, “8”, “8”, and “8”).

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, if the 2R probability variation big hit is achieved, the decorative symbol variable display is started and the reach state is reached and the predetermined reach is reached. After the performance is executed or the like, or without reaching the reach state, it is only necessary to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol that is the big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit. An example of a jackpot combination corresponding to a 2R probability variable jackpot is a different decorative symbol (one of at least three symbols) on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. 3 decorative patterns (for example, “1”, “3”, “5”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “5”, “5”, “7”) Or a combination including a predetermined decorative pattern (for example, a combination of “1”, “probability”, “2”, etc.).

  In the special figure game, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability changing big hit is stopped and the 8R probability changing on the surface. There may be a case where a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

  Based on the fact that the 16R probability variable big hit is reached, the normal open round is controlled to the normal open big hit state that is executed 16 times (rounds). ) Is performed. Further, based on the fact that the 8R probability variable big hit has been reached, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which the normal open round is executed eight times (rounds), and after that, the probability change control is performed together with the time reduction control.

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than when the probability variation control is not performed. The probability variation control is performed when a special game of a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as a probability variation number) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, or when the variable display result is “big hit”. End when is established first. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is being performed, the probability variation control is not performed if the special game of the predetermined number of ST times (number of probability variation) is digested. finish. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

  In addition, by performing the time reduction control, the variable symbol variable display time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to when the time reduction control is not performed. Time-shortening control is performed when either of a predetermined time-saving special-purpose game is executed and the variable display result is “hit” after the end of the big hit gaming state. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the time-shortening control is being performed, the time-shortening control is ended when the predetermined time-saving special game is consumed. Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is 70, for example.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses a normal symbol change time (ordinary time change time) in the normal game to be shorter than that in the case where the time reduction control is not performed. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per symbol”, the control for improving the probability that the variable display result is “per symbol”, compared to the case where the time control is not performed. The game ball receives the second starting prize, such as a control that makes the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable blade piece longer than when the time-short control is not performed, and a control that increases the number of tilts compared to when the time-short control is not performed. Control that is advantageous for the player is performed by facilitating passage (entrance) through the mouth and increasing the possibility that the second start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. Further, the gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a high probability state or a probability variation state. The short time state (high base state) and the high probability state (probability variation state) are examples of advantageous states advantageous to the player.

  A gaming state in which time-shortened control or high-opening control is performed together with probability variation control, that is, a gaming state that is both highly accurate state (probability variation state) and high base state (time-short state) is a highly accurate high base state or a time variation probability variation state. Also called. A gaming state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short-time control or the high opening control is not performed, that is, the gaming state that is in the high-probability state (probability variation state) but not in the high base state (time-short state) is the high probability low base state. Or it is also called a short-term uncertain change state. Note that only the high-accuracy high-base state (short-time accurate variation state) may be referred to as “accuracy variation state”. A gaming state in which short-time control or high-opening control is performed without probability variation control, that is, a gaming state that is not in a high probability state (probability variation state) but in a high base state (short time state) is also referred to as a low probability high base state. Is done. A gaming state in which neither time-change control nor high-open control is performed without probability variation control, that is, a game state that is neither in a high-probability state (probability variation state) nor in a high base state (time-short state) is also referred to as a low probability low base state. Is done. The low accuracy low base state is a normal state in which neither the accuracy variation control, the time reduction control nor the high opening control is performed, so it is distinguished from the high accuracy high base state, the high accuracy low base state, the low accuracy high base state, etc. It may be referred to as “normal state”. Note that a gaming state that is not a big hit gaming state may be referred to as a “normal state” in distinction from the big hit gaming state. The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the state after the initialization process is executed after power-on as in the case where the system is reset) is a normal state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control is made to the normally open big hit state based on the fact that the 8R probability variation big hit or the 16R probability variation big hit is reached, and after that, a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times), a high accuracy high base is achieved. Controlled by the state.

  In this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) and the ST number (number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times), but the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R). The number of time reductions after the probability variation big hit) may be different from the ST number (the number of probability variation). In this embodiment, the number of STs after the 8R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation) and the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times). The number of STs after the big hit (the number of probability variation) may be different from the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation). Further, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit is the same (both 70 times) after the 16R probability variation big hit, but the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit. And the short time after the 16R probability variation big hit may be different.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the short-term open big hit is executed based on the fact that the 2R probability variation big hit is performed. After the completion of the control, the probability variation control may be performed together with the time reduction control in the same manner as when 16R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit is reached.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become “big hit” when probability variation control is being performed, when a special game with a predetermined number of STs (probability variation number) is consumed. Although the probability variation control ends, the probability variation control may not be terminated until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST count (number of probability variation). That is, a probability variation big hit may be provided in which probability variation control is continued until the next big hit. When the probability variation big hit that continues the probability variation control until the next big hit is provided, a normal big hit that is not subjected to the probability variation control after the end may be further provided. For example, the normal opening round is controlled to the normal opening big hit state in which the normal opening round is executed 8 times (round), and the probability variation control is not performed after the completion (the time-shortening control or the high opening control may or may not be performed). ), 8R normal big hit may be provided.

  In addition, the probability variation control is terminated when it is determined that “there is a certain probability of falling” in the probability variation falling lottery executed every time a special game is started after the end of the big hit gaming state. It may be. In such an embodiment, after the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the probability of change) is not digested until the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the number of changes with certainty) is exhausted, A probabilistic falling lottery may be performed in each game. The same applies to the time reduction control and the high opening control.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for a decorative pattern. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit, the variation is changed again with the same decorative symbols aligned. , Any one of the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit and the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big hit may be finally stopped and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols. In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the same applies to the case where a decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is displayed temporarily.

  In addition, after the definite decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big win is derived and displayed, the period until the end of the eighth round (or after the end of the eighth round, the next variable display game is executed). In the period until it is started, a round number promotion effect for notifying that the jackpot is a 16R probability variable jackpot may be executed. In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the same applies to the case where a definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal big hit is not provided, but after the fixed decorative symbol that is the big hit combination corresponding to the normal big win is derived and displayed when the normal big hit is provided, the period until the final round ends ( Alternatively, a probable change promotion effect for notifying that the big hit is a probable big hit may be executed during the period until the next variable display game is started after the end of the final round.

  In addition, the promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) executed during the round is referred to as jackpot medium promotion effect (bonus medium number of rounds promotion effect, jackpot medium chance change promotion effect), and after the final round ends The promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) to be executed may be referred to as an ending promotion effect (ending round number promotion effect, ending probability change promotion effect).

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. 9 and various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the movable accessory 17 are mounted.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. The lamp driver circuit to perform is installed. The accessory control board 16 is a control board for controlling the action of an accessory provided separately from the effect control board 12, and drives the movable accessory 17 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A circuit for outputting a drive signal is mounted on an actuator (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11. ), A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibrations, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the effect control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the effect control command may be one or may be three or more. Good.

  In addition, the information which comprises each presentation control command may be memorize | stored in the command table in ROM101, for example. When a certain effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, as a setting for transmitting the effect control command, the storage address of the effect control command in the command table is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area. Thereafter, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed, and the effect control command set as described above is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is transmitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command that specifies the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing”, “16R-probable big hit” or “8R-probable big hit” or the type of jackpot Different EXT data is set according to the determination result.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating a confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the big winning opening is opened to notify that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. This is a first start port winning notification command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied (at the time of the first start port winning designation command, first start port winning) Sometimes called command).

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and the second start winning is generated. This is a second start opening prize notification command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B is satisfied (second start opening prize specifying command, second start opening prize) Sometimes called hour command).

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the like.

  For example, when the first start winning is generated (when the first special figure holding memory number is increased), the first holding memory number notification command is transmitted together with the first starting port winning notification command as the holding memory information. Further, when the second start winning is generated (when the second special figure holding memory number is increased), the second holding memory number notification command is transmitted together with the second starting port winning notification command as the holding memory information. In addition, when the first start prize is generated, the second reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted in addition to the first start opening prize notification command or the first reserved memory number notification command, or the second start prize is generated. In this case, the first reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted in addition to the second start opening prize notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command. Further, when the first special figure reserved memory number (or the second special figure reserved memory number) increases, the first start-winning memory display area 5HL (or the second start-winning memory display area 5HR) or the like is displayed. A first reserved memory number addition designation command (or second reserved memory number addition designation command) for designating addition of the special figure reserved memory number (second special figure reserved memory number) is transmitted, and the first special figure reserved memory number ( Alternatively, the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (or the second reserved memory number) for designating the subtraction of the first special figure reserved memory number (or the second special figure reserved memory number) when the second special figure reserved memory number) decreases. (Memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of or in addition to the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. Further, a total reserved memory number addition designation command (total reserved memory number subtraction designation command) for designating addition (or subtraction) of the total reserved memory number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and a determination result of the big hit type as a winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category designation command (also referred to as a variation category command) indicating a determination result as to whether or not the variation category is a variation category corresponding to a specific pattern (described later) as a winning determination result. The variation category is also called a variation pattern type, and is a name when the variation patterns of decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (FIG. 16), at the time of starting winning, except for some cases (when there is a first starting winning in a high base state, etc.) Based on the random number value MR3, it is determined whether or not the variation category is a variation category corresponding to a specific pattern (described later). Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 displays the variable display based on the start prize based on the value set in the variable category command transmitted from the main board 11 when the start prize is generated. Or not.

  Note that the effect control commands such as the change pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are controlled by the effect control CPU 120 for one or more effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 17, and the like). Used when Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the display operation in the image display device 5 is also referred to as a display control command, the effect control command used to control the sound output operation by the speaker 8 is also referred to as an audio control command, and the lamp 9 An effect control command used to control the light emission operation is also referred to as a lamp control command, and an effect control command used to control the operation of the movable accessory 17 is also referred to as an accessory control command. It should be noted that, among the effect control commands, there are those related to a plurality of effect devices such as display control commands, voice control commands, lamp control commands, and accessory control commands. Good.

  The command D0XX is a big winning opening prize notification command for notifying that a game ball has won a big winning opening (sometimes referred to as a big winning opening prize designation command). The big prize opening prize notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 when a game ball passes through the big prize opening, for example.

  Command E0XX is a magnetic abnormality notification designation command for designating notification that a magnetic abnormality has occurred. For example, a magnet sensor (not shown, also referred to as a magnetic sensor) is provided on the back of a predetermined area of the game area 2, and the magnetic abnormality notification designation command is used when the magnet sensor detects an abnormality (the magnet sensor indicating an abnormal value). When a signal is input), the signal is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, a magnet sensor detects abnormality, for example, when there exists an act which leads a game ball to a winning opening illegally using a magnet. As a method for detecting a magnetic abnormality, the abnormal value may be detected with the reference value kept constant, or the abnormal value may be detected with the magnetic value at power-on as the reference value.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing the operation and an input / output port (I / O) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, Numeric data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the decorative pattern variation pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach loss variation pattern”, “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss”. (Also referred to as “(loss) variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern ”(“ reach loss variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ reach ”among the cases where the variable display result is“ losing ”. Also referred to as).

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and a “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. Also good. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared for multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to time-short control that is executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is a high-accuracy state or a short-time state. It is good to leave. As a result, any variation pattern is selected according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, thereby enabling control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  For variation patterns including a reach effect such as a big hit variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a variation category and a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA2-1” and “PA2-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-3” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB1” is a shortening / reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation pattern “PB1-1” belongs to the variation category “PB1”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-3” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-3” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variable category “PA4” and the variable category “PA5” are collectively referred to as “super reach (losing) variable category”, and the variable category “PB4” and variable category “PB5” are collectively referred to as “super reach (big hit). ) Fluctuation category ", the fluctuation category" PA4 ", the fluctuation category" PA5 ", the fluctuation category" PB4 ", and the fluctuation category" PB5 "are collectively referred to as" super reach fluctuation category ".

  Among the super-reach variation categories, the variation category “PA5” and the variation category “PB5” are variation categories with an accessory action including the operation of the movable accessory 17, and the variation category “PA4” and the variation category “PB4” are This is a variation category that does not include the operation of the movable accessory 17 and does not include the operation of the accessory. That is, the movable accessory 17 does not operate in the super reach α, but the movable accessory 17 operates in the super reach β.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed.

  The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PB1-1” belonging to the variation category “PB1” is a shortened / reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PB3-1”.

  In addition, although the fluctuation category “PB1” has been described as a shortening / reach (big hit) fluctuation category, three symbols (for example, the same symbol) are stopped at the same time without going through reach, and the shortening / reach (big hit) becomes a big hit. It may be a non-reach (big hit) variable category. The variation pattern “PB1-1” when the variation category “PB1” is a shortened / non-reach (big hit) variation category is a shortened / non-reach (big hit) variation pattern. Note that “shortening / non-reach (big hit)” is also called “hit”, “short / non-reach (big hit) fluctuation category” is also called “hits fluctuation category”, and “shortening / non-reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern”. "Is also referred to as a" crash variation pattern ". Further, the variation category “PB1” may include a shortened / reach (big hit) variation pattern and a shortened / non-reach (big hit) variation pattern.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In addition to the above, a variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed, or a variation in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) gusset (for example, a similar effect to a pseudo-continuous effect is executed but not temporarily stopped) is performed. A pattern may be prepared.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is provided, a variation category for 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) may be provided. For example, variation categories “PC1”, “PC2”, and “PC3” for 2R probability variation big hit (surprise) may be provided. Variation patterns “PC1-1” and “PC1-2” belong to the variation category “PC1”. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-1” is a non-reach (surprising) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PC1-2” is a non-reach (probability) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Note that a non-reach (accuracy) variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed may be prepared.

  Variation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-3” belong to the variation category “PC2”. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PC2-2” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC2-3” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice. Note that a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which quasi-continuous variation (effect) gusset is executed may be prepared.

  Variation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-3” belong to the variation category “PC3”. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-1” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PC3-2” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC3-3” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice. Note that a super reach β (accuracy) variation pattern in which the pseudo-variable variation (effect) is performed may be prepared.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 101 stores data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, The data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6 includes a first special symbol game (a special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In the game (special game using the second special figure), before the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variable display result is the big hit (16R positive variable big hit, 8R positive variable big hit) It is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the gaming state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  In the display result determination table 130, according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a numerical value (determination value) compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is “big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit). ”And“ Lose ”are assigned to special map display results. Specifically, in the display result determination table 130, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the state is the low probability state or the high probability state. It is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” and “losing”.

  In the display result determination table 130, when the gaming state is the high probability state, more judgment values are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” than when the gaming state is the low probability state. Specifically, a predetermined number (specifically, 190) of determination values (values in the range of “8000” to “8189”) are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the low probability state. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy state, more than the predetermined number (specifically, 819) of judgment values “8000” to “8818” are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. With this setting, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” as compared with the case of the non-probability variation state (low probability state). When the game state is controlled, the probability of being determined increases.

  Note that different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure. In the first special figure display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result of “small hit” has a predetermined range. A determination value is assigned, and in the second special figure display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result in which the determination value in a predetermined range is smaller than the first special figure display result determination table is “small hit” May be assigned. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether or not (special game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is the big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation). Jackpot).

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the game is the first special figure game, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined number (specifically, 50 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “49”) are assigned to 16R probability variation big hits. On the other hand, in the case of the second special figure game, that is, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the determination values (“0” to “0”) more than the predetermined number (specifically, 80). 79 ”) is assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot. With such a setting, in the second special figure game, the 16R probability variation big hit is more likely than in the first special figure, so that the game state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( In the high-accuracy and high-base state (specifically, up to the 70th rotation after the end of the big hit), it is possible to enhance the expectation that the 16R-probable big hit will be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (clash accuracy) is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is provided, the second special figure game is more effective than the first special figure game. Alternatively, a smaller number of determination values may be assigned to the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise). With such a setting, in the second special figure game, 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is less likely than in the first special figure, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In the gaming state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability), which makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest by extending the game.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine the variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table and different determination ratios. In the variable category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variable category is assigned to each variable category. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR5 for variation pattern determination is assigned to each variation pattern. Note that one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables.

  The ROM 101 stores a prefetch determination table that is referred to for determining whether or not the variation category is a specific pattern (described later). Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of prefetch determination tables having different determination contents and determination ratios. In the prefetch determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each determination content. Instead of a plurality of prefetch determination tables, one large prefetch determination table including information on all the prefetch determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least the game state, that is, data corresponding to the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flags). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting winning is generated. Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (first special figure hold information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special game that has not yet started even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second starting winning has occurred. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates a holding number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and makes a random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (second special figure hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The first special symbol game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The general-purpose hold storage unit 151C stores on-hold data related to a general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as hold data (ordinary hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the game control flag setting unit 152 indicates data indicating flag values, an on state or an off state for each of the special figure process flag, the high probability flag, the high base flag, the big hit flag, and the like. Data is stored. The high-accuracy flag is a flag indicating whether the state is a high-accuracy state or a low-accuracy state. The high base flag is a flag indicating whether the base state is a high base state or a low base state. The big hit flag is a flag indicating that it is a big hit gaming state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered. The game control counter setting unit 154 also stores a stored value (variation count value) of a variation counter (described later).

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124, an I / O 125, and an RTC (real time clock) circuit 126 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, whereby various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory). 17 etc.) is executed to control the rendering operation. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The RTC circuit 126 is a time measuring means capable of measuring the time such as the current date and hour / minute / second. The RTC circuit 126 has a function of automatically adjusting the time measurement value to the Japan standard time periodically using a radio clock. When the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC circuit 126 operates by receiving supply of power from a backup power supply circuit (not shown). The timing information by the RTC circuit 126 is supplied to the CPU 120 for effect control.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14 and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  For example, in the ROM 121, an on / off determination execution determination table for referencing for determining whether or not an effect such as a hold is executed, or an effect pattern such as a hold when an effect such as an on hold is determined to be executed (for example, added) An effect pattern determination table such as hold to be referred to may be stored for determining a display mode of hold display and a display mode of active display from time to time.

  The ROM 121 also has a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 17, and the like). Data to be configured is stored. Each production control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents of various production operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, various production operations are realized by setting production control patterns. For example, the decorative display variable display operation corresponding to each variation pattern is realized by setting an effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern. The hold effect, the active display effect, the fanfare effect, the effect during the round game (the effect during the opening, the effect during the closing), the ending effect, and the like are also realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each effect.

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable accessory control data, and an end code. It is comprised from data, and the content of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. should just be set in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer. And the judgment value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is preset. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. In other words, data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like that is interlocked with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9. That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the light emission operation of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation according to an operation on the operation unit. The movable accessory control data includes, for example, data indicating the operation mode of the movable accessory 17. That is, the movable accessory control data is data that specifies the operation of the movable accessory 17. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data. In the effective period, control for receiving the operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and determining the production content is performed. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to an effect device that does not become a control target even if it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the presentation operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect device (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 9. Control of movable accessory 17 etc. is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n, movable accessory control data # 1 to movable accessory control data #n Production control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n indicating the control content of the production operation in the apparatus and designating execution of production control are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, the accessory control board 16, and the like. For example, in the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the CPU 120 for effect control, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like develops the image data indicated by the command by reading it from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. Let On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the production control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating flag values and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of the production process flag, the high-accuracy flag, the high base flag, and the like. The

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of the multiple types of counters. The effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating an effect number count value that is a stored value of an effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Specifically, four commands (first start opening prize notification command, symbol designation command, variable category command, first reserved memory number notification command) are one set, or two commands (first start opening prize notification) Command, first reserved memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, among these commands transmitted from the main board 11, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number notification command can be stored for each buffer number. A storage area for storing the symbol designating command, a storage area for storing the variable category command, and a storage area for storing the first reserved memory number notification command are secured.

  The effect control CPU 120 associates the command received from the main board 11 at the time of the first start winning prize with each set and stores it in the storage area of the first start winning prize received command buffer 194A. For example, when the CPU 120 for effect control normally receives four commands (first start opening winning notification command, symbol designating command, variable category command, first reserved memory number notification command) at the time of first starting winning, None of the storage areas for the buffer number (the storage area for storing the symbol designating command, the storage area for storing the variable category command, or the storage area for storing the first pending storage number notification command) In each buffer number storage area), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number notification command are stored. When the storage areas for a plurality of buffer numbers are free areas, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the first reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area for the smallest buffer number that is an empty area. The example shown in FIG. 10B represents a state in which commands are stored in the storage areas of buffer numbers “1” to “3”. On the other hand, when the CPU 120 for effect control normally receives two commands at the time of the first start winning (the first start opening winning notification command and the first reserved memory number notification command), the buffer number that is an empty area is stored. Area (storage area for storing symbol designation command (storage area indicated as “designation” in FIG. 10B)), storage area for storing variation category command (indicated as “variation category” in FIG. 10 (B)) Each of the buffer numbers in which nothing is stored in either the storage area) or the storage area for storing the first reserved memory number notification command (the storage area indicated as “notice of the reserved memory number” in FIG. 10B). The first reserved memory number notification command is stored in the storage area. When the storage areas for a plurality of buffer numbers are free areas, the first pending storage number notification command is stored in the storage area for the smallest buffer number that is an empty area.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, one command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number is deleted and deleted. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command are shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship). For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Shifted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data configuring the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning in the second start winning opening, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Specifically, four commands (second start opening prize notification command, symbol designation command, variation category command, second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, among these commands transmitted from the main board 11, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a second reserved memory number notification command can be stored for each buffer number. , A storage area for storing the symbol designating command, a storage area for storing the variable category command, and a storage area for storing the second reserved memory number notification command are secured.

  The effect control CPU 120 associates the command received from the main board 11 at the time of the second start prize and stores it in the storage area of the second start prize reception command buffer 194B in association with each set. For example, when the CPU 120 for effect control normally receives four commands (second start opening prize notification command, symbol designation command, variable category command, second reserved memory number notification command) at the time of the second start winning prize, The storage area for the buffer number (the storage area for storing the symbol designation command (the storage area indicated as “designation designation” in FIG. 10C)), the storage area for storing the variable category command (FIG. 10C) Nothing is stored in both the storage area indicated as “variable category” in FIG. 10 and the storage area for storing the second reserved memory number notification command (the storage area indicated as “notice of reserved memory number” in FIG. 10C). The symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the second reserved storage number notification command are stored in the respective storage areas of the buffer numbers that have not been set. When the storage areas for a plurality of buffer numbers are free areas, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the second reserved memory count notification command are stored in the storage area for the smallest buffer number that is an empty area. Note that the example shown in FIG. 10C represents a state in which commands are stored in the storage areas of the buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, one command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number is deleted and deleted. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command are shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship). For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to each data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C, the contents of the prefetching notice effects relating to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the first prefetch preview buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents of the prefetch notice effects relating to the hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing (including sensor error notification processing), abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step) S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process of step S13, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process (step S14). In the game random number update process in step S14, for example, at least a part of game random numbers (for example, random number values MR1 to MR5) used on the main board 11 side is updated by software. As an example, the CPU 103 may update numerical data indicating a game random number counted by a random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 by software.

  Following the game random number update process in step S14, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a normal symbol process (step S16). By executing the normal symbol process, the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) of the normal symbol display 20 is controlled to change the normal symbol variable display and the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Enables the tilting operation setting.

  Subsequent to the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the sensor error notification process (step S12) executed in the game control timer interrupt process. In the sensor error notification process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a magnet sensor signal indicating an abnormal value is input from the magnet sensor (step S20). If no magnet sensor signal is input in step S20 (step S20; NO), the sensor error notification process is terminated.

  When a magnet sensor signal is input in step S20 (step S20; YES), the CPU 103 determines that a magnetic abnormality has occurred, sets a magnetic abnormality flag indicating that the magnetic abnormality has been detected (step S21), The error notification LED is turned on to notify that a magnetic abnormality has occurred (step S22), and a setting for transmitting a magnetic abnormality notification designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S23). Then, the sensor error notification process ends. The magnetic abnormality notification designation command set in step S23 is executed, for example, by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 11 after the main-side error process is completed. And transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first uses a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the first special figure holding memory number (the first special figure game holding number) is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step S202). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  If it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S202; NO), the CPU 103 stores the value stored in the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (starting). "1" is set to (mouth buffer value) (step S207). Subsequent to the processing in step S207, the CPU 103 executes a start winning process (FIG. 15) (step S208), and sets (clears) “0” in the start port buffer value (step S209).

  If it is determined in step S201 that the first start-up switch 22A is not on (step S201 (NO)), or if it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure holding memory number has reached the upper limit value, (Step S202 (YES)) After executing the processing of Step S209, the CPU 103 receives the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Based on the detection signal, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON (step S203). When it is determined in step S203 that the second start port switch 22B is on (step S203; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the second special figure hold memory number (the second special figure game hold number) is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step S204). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example.

  When it is determined in step S204 that the second special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S204; NO), the CPU 103 stores the value stored in the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (start "2" is set to (mouth buffer value) (step S210). Subsequent to the processing in step S210, the CPU 103 executes a start winning time process (FIG. 15) (step S211), sets (clears) “0” in the start port buffer value (step S212), and starts a winning determination process. Exit.

  When it is determined in step S203 that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S203 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S204 that the second special figure holding memory number has reached the upper limit value. (Step S204 (YES)), the start winning determination process is terminated without performing the processes of steps S210, S211 and S212.

  According to the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 14, even when the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B detect the start winning of the game ball at the same time, the processing based on the respective detections Can be completed.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process (step S208, step S211). In the start winning process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first updates the special figure holding storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value to be incremented by 1 (step S <b> 215). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storage is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the process of step S218, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a start port winning notification command corresponding to the start port buffer value to the effect control board 12 (step S219). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting the first start port winning notification command is performed. Further, when the start port buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting the second start port winning notification command is performed. The start opening prize notification command set in step S219 is obtained by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  Following the process of step S219, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (step S220). Thereafter, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a pending storage number notification command (step S221). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting the first reserved memory number notification command is performed. Further, when the start port buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting the second reserved memory number notification command is performed. Then, the start winning process is terminated. Note that the reserved memory count notification command set in step S221 is executed, for example, by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed. And transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of winning random number determination processing (step S220). In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 first identifies the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S401). In the process of step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game state is a big hit game state by checking the state of the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Specifically, the CPU 103 identifies the big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is on, and identifies that the big hit flag is not the big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is not on (when it is off). Further, in the process of step S401, the CPU 103 identifies the high base state or the low base state by confirming the state of the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Specifically, the CPU 103 identifies the high base state when the high base flag is on, and identifies the low base state when the high base flag is not on (when the high base flag is off). . Further, in the process of step S401, the CPU 103 may identify whether the state is the high-predicted state or the low-predicted state by confirming the state of the high-predictive flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Good. Specifically, the CPU 103 identifies the high-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is on, and identifies the low-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is not on (when it is off). May be.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit gaming state is present (step S402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the game state is a big hit gaming state in the process of step S401. When it is determined in step S402 that the game state is not the big hit game state (step S402; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (step S403). That is, it is determined whether or not the high base state is specified in the process of step S401.

  If it is determined in step S402 that the game state is a big hit game state (step S402; YES), or if it is determined in step S403 that the base state is a high base state (step S403; YES), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value. Is “2” or not (step S404). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the second start prize (start prize where the variation special chart is the second special figure). When it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is not “2” (step S404; NO), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not in the high base state (step S403 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S404 (YES)), The CPU 103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (step S405). Specifically, when the CPU 103 is not in the high-accuracy state, the table data for the low-accuracy state (the value in the range of “8000” to “8189” is “big hit”) from the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. When the table data assigned to the special figure display result is set and is in the high-accuracy state, the table data for the high-accuracy state (“8000” to “8818” is displayed from the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. The table data assigned to the special figure display result with the range value “big hit” is set, and the CPU 103 identifies the high-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is on, and the high-accuracy flag is When it is not in the on state (when it is in the off state), it may be specified that the state is in a low probability state, and different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure. In the case of using the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table), when the start port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table is used to If the buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table may be used.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S405, the CPU 103 determines that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 15 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range. It is determined whether or not there is (step S406). For example, the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 with each determination value assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. Then, it is determined whether there is a determination value that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR1. Alternatively, the CPU 103 determines the minimum value (lower limit value) of the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 and the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. ) And the maximum value (upper limit value) may be compared to determine whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the range of the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination value.

  If it is determined in step S406 that it is within the big hit determination range (step S406; YES), the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 15 is shown. The big hit type is determined based on the numerical data (step S407). Specifically, first, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified by the start port buffer value. Set (select) a big hit type determination table. Specifically, the CPU 103 sets table data corresponding to the fluctuation special map from the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type with the determination value of each big hit type in the big hit type determining table data set in accordance with the fluctuation special figure. Thus, the jackpot type that matches the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 may be determined.

  Subsequent to the process of step S407, the CPU 103 performs a setting for transmitting a symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result of the process of step S407 to the effect control board 12 (step S408). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S406 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S406; NO), a setting for transmitting a symbol designation command corresponding to the loss to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S406). S409). Note that the symbol designating command set in step S409 is executed mainly by executing the command control processing (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process processing is completed. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

After executing the process of step S408 or the process of step S409, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base state is set (step S410). Note that the process of step S410 is executed in the following four scenes (scene 1 to scene 4).
(Scene 1)
A scene that is not in the big hit gaming state and in the low base state (when step S402 (NO), step S403 (NO)). It may be the first start prize (start prize where the variation special figure is the first special figure) or the second start prize (start prize where the variable special figure is the second special figure).
(Scene 2)
A scene in which the second start winning is not in the big hit gaming state and in the high base state (when step S402 (NO), step S403 (YES), step S404 (YES)).
(Scene 3)
In the big hit gaming state and when there is a second start winning in the low base state (when step S402 (YES), step S404 (YES)).
(Scene 4)
In the big hit gaming state and when there is a second start winning in the high base state (when step S402 (YES), step S404 (YES)).

  When it is determined in step S410 that the high base state is not set (step S410; NO), that is, in the case of the scene 1 or the scene 3, the CPU 103 uses the low base state for the special figure display result. A prefetch determination table is set (selected) (step S411). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S410 that the state is the high base state (step S410; YES), that is, in the case of the scene 2 or the scene 4, the CPU 103 determines the high base state according to the special figure display result. A prefetch determination table is set (selected) (step S412).

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the prefetch determination table. FIG. 17A is a configuration example of a prefetch determination table that is referred to when the special figure display result is “lost” in the low base state. FIG. 17B is a configuration example of a prefetch determination table that is referred to when the special figure display result is “lost” in the high base state. FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a prefetch determination table referred to when the special figure display result is “big hit” in the low base state or the high base state. FIG. 17D shows an example of setting a variation category command. The “specific pattern” is a variation pattern that becomes a super reach variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved memories. The “non-specific pattern” is a variation pattern other than the “specific pattern”.

  The prefetch determination table in FIG. 17A is set based on the setting of the variation category determination table that is referred to when the special figure display result is “lost” in the low base state shown in FIG. Yes. According to the variation category determination table in FIG. 20A, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is any one of “97” to “99”, the super reach variation category (variation Category “PA4”, “PA5”). In other words, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is any one of “97” to “99”, the super reach variation pattern (variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-3”) regardless of the number of reserved memories. , Variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3”) (see FIG. 21). Therefore, when the special figure display result is “losing” in the low base state, at least if the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is any one of “97” to “99”, the start winning variable or the variable display start Regardless of the number of reserved memories at the time (the time of the change), a specific change pattern (specific pattern) called a super reach change pattern is determined. Therefore, in the prefetch determination table of FIG. 17A, a value in the range of “97” to “99” is assigned to “specific pattern”, and “0” to “non-specific pattern” other than “specific pattern”. A value in the range of “96” is assigned.

  The prefetch determination table of FIG. 17B is set based on the setting of the variation category determination table that is referred to when the special figure display result is “lost” in the high base state shown in FIG. Yes. According to the variation category determination table of FIG. 20B, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is any one of “89” to “99”, the super reach variation category (variation) regardless of the number of reserved memories. Category “PA4”, “PA5”). That is, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is any one of “89” to “99”, the super reach variation pattern (variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-3”) regardless of the number of reserved memories. , Variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3”) (see FIG. 21). Therefore, when the special figure display result is “losing” in the high base state, at least if the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is any one of “89” to “99”, at the time of starting winning or starting variable display Regardless of the number of reserved storage at the time (at the time of the change), the specific pattern is determined. Therefore, in the prefetch determination table of FIG. 17B, a value in the range of “89” to “99” is assigned to “specific pattern”, and “0” to “non-specific pattern” other than “specific pattern”. A value in the range of “88” is assigned.

  The prefetch determination table of FIG. 17C is a variation category determination table that is referred to when the special figure display result is “big hit” in the low base state shown in FIG. 20C, and FIG. In the high base state shown, the special figure display result is set based on the variation category determination table that is referred to when “big hit” is set. According to the variation category determination table of FIG. 20C and the variation category determination table of FIG. 20D, if the random number MR3 for determination of the variation category is any one of “60” to “99”, Regardless of the number of reserved storage, it is determined to be a super reach variation category (variation categories “PB4” and “PB5”). That is, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is any one of “60” to “99”, the super reach variation pattern (variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-3”) regardless of the number of reserved storages. , Variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-3”) (see FIG. 21). Therefore, when the special figure display result is “big hit” in the low base state or the high base state, if at least the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is any one of “60” to “99”, the start winning prize Alternatively, the specific pattern is determined regardless of the number of reserved memories at the start of variable display (at the time of change). Therefore, in the prefetch determination table of FIG. 17C, a value in the range of “60” to “99” is assigned to “specific pattern”, and “0” to “non-specific pattern” other than “specific pattern”. A value in the range of “59” is assigned.

  Therefore, in the process of step S411 executed when it is determined in step S410 that the high base state is not set, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “lost” in step S406, and FIG. When the table data constituting the prefetch determination table shown in (A) is set and it is determined in step S406 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the prefetching shown in FIG. Set the table data that makes up the decision table.

  Further, in the process of step S412 executed when it is determined in step S410 that the high base state is set, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “lost” in step S406. When the table data constituting the prefetch determination table shown in (B) is set and it is determined in step S406 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the prefetching shown in FIG. Set the table data that makes up the decision table.

  After executing the process of step S411 or the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines whether the variation pattern is “non-specific pattern” or “specific pattern” based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category. Whether or not there is prefetching is determined (step S413). Specifically, the CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 15 and the prefetching set in step S411 or S412. By comparing the determination value of “non-specific pattern” or “specific pattern” in the determination table data, either the determination value of “non-specific pattern” or the determination value of “specific pattern” is the random value MR3. What is necessary is just to determine whether it corresponds with the numerical data shown.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S413, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the variable category command according to the determination result (prefetching determination) in step S413 (step S414), and ends the winning random number determination processing. In the process of step S414, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting for transmitting any of the variable category commands shown in FIG. 17D according to the determination result in the process of step S413. Specifically, in the process of step S413, when it is determined that the pattern is a non-specific pattern (losing), the transmission setting for transmitting the variation category command in which “00” is set in the EXT data to the effect control board 12. When it is determined that the pattern is a specific pattern (losing), a transmission setting for transmitting a variation category command in which “01” is set in the EXT data to the effect control board 12 is performed, and a non-specific pattern (big hit) is set. When it is determined that there is a transmission category command for transmitting the variation category command in which “02” is set in the EXT data to the effect control board 12, it is determined that the specific pattern (big hit) is “03” in the EXT data. Is set for transmission to the effect control board 12.

  Subsequent to the start winning determination process (step S101), the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. .

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “0”. The special symbol normal process includes a process of determining (predetermining) whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal process, when the variable display result is determined in advance, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. The variation pattern setting process includes a process for determining a variation pattern based on the variable display result determined in advance in the special symbol normal process (step S110), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a first variation start command. (Or a second variation start command) or the like. In the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. In the special symbol variation process, the special symbol is varied (variably displayed) in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the start of variation is changed to the special symbol variation time (FIG. 5). It includes a process for determining whether or not it has been reached. In the special symbol variation process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3” when the elapsed time after the variation starts reaches the special symbol variation time.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the special symbol variation, and the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), or the big hit flag is turned off. (When the variable display result is determined to be “lost” in the special symbol normal process (step S110) in advance), the game state transition at the time of transition that changes the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. Processing or setting process for sending a hit start command (fanfare command) as a process to be executed when the big hit flag is on (when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” in advance) Etc. In the special symbol stop process, when the big hit flag is off, the special figure process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and when the big hit flag is on, the special figure process flag is updated. Is updated to “4”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes a process for setting the grand prize opening to be in an open state (for example, setting a solenoid driving signal for the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door to open the big prize opening) , Including a setting process for transmitting a command for notifying a prize winning opening. In the big hit release pre-processing, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release process in step S115 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on whether or not the elapsed time after opening the big prize opening has passed a predetermined time, whether or not the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 has reached a predetermined number. Processing for determining the timing for returning the winning opening from the open state to the closed state, and setting for closing the big winning opening (for example, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door for closing the winning opening) For example, setting of a solenoid driving signal) and setting processing for transmitting a notification command after opening a special prize opening. In the big hit release processing, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. After the big hit opening process, the process of determining whether the number of executions of the round with the grand prize opening in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or when the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening is not reached Including processing to send a notification command during the opening of a special prize opening as processing to be executed, and setting processing to send a hit end designation command as processing to be executed when the maximum value of the number of special prize opening is reached It is out. In the post-hit opening process, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the maximum number of times of winning the big winning opening, the value of the special process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process of step S117 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process is a process to determine whether or not the big hit end stage waiting time (waiting time corresponding to the ending stage execution period) has passed, or a process to be executed when the big jackpot end stage waiting time has passed This includes processing for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a highly accurate and high-base state, processing for setting the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the like. In the big hit end process, when the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

  The big hit release process (step S115), the big hit release post-process (step S116), the big hit pre-release process (step S114), and the big hit end process (step S117) are awarded when the count switch 23 is turned on. It includes a transmission setting for transmitting the oral winning notification command.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process (step S110). In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S <b> 231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  If it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure hold storage number is not “0” (step S231; NO), the CPU 103 starts the special figure from the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. The hold data (numerical data) of the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are read out and temporarily stored (step S232). That is, when there is a hold (holding data) for the second special figure game, the CPU 103 uses the second special figure hold storage unit as the change hold data regardless of whether or not the first special figure game is held. The numerical data corresponding to the hold number “1” of 151B (the hold data of the second special figure game extracted in step S217 in the earliest (oldest)) is read and temporarily stored in a random number buffer for fluctuation or the like. .

  Following the processing of step S232, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second special figure hold storage number stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (see FIG. 8) and also uses the second special figure hold storage unit 151B (see FIG. 8). 8) is shifted (step S233). Specifically, in the process of step S233, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second reserved memory count value, and at the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, an entry lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, the reservation number). The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “4” are shifted up by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S233, the CPU 103 may subtract 1 from the total pending storage count value. Subsequent to the process of step S233, the CPU 103 updates the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer, to “2” (step S234).

  If it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S231; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. Determination is made (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine.

  If it is determined in step S235 that the first special figure hold storage number is not “0” (step S235; NO), the CPU 103 starts the special figure from the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. The pending data (numerical data) of the random number MR1 for determining the display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are read out and temporarily stored (step S236). In other words, when there is no hold (holding data) of the second special figure game (step S231 (YES)) and there is a hold of the first special figure game, the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation holding data as the change data. The numerical data corresponding to the holding number “1” in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A (the first special figure game holding data extracted in step S217) is read out and stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation. Store temporarily in

  Subsequent to the processing of step S236, the CPU 103 decrements the first special figure reservation storage number stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (see FIG. 8) by 1 and the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A (FIG. 8) is shifted (step S237). Specifically, in the process of step S237, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first reserved storage number count value, and the first special figure hold storage unit 151A has an entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the hold number). The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “4” are shifted up by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S237, the CPU 103 may subtract 1 from the total reserved storage number count value. Subsequent to the processing in step S237, the CPU 103 updates the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer, to “1” (step S238).

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure holding storage number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure are executed. When the game is put on hold, the second special game is executed with priority over the first special game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to being executed in preference to the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes through) the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening). ) And the special game (first special game, second special game) may be executed in the order in which the start prizes (first start prize, second start prize) are generated. In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine which of the first special game and the second special game is to be executed from the stored data.

  After executing the process of step S234 or the process of step S238, the CPU 103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (step S239). For example, the CPU 103 may set the special figure display result determination table in the same manner as step S405 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. When different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the process of step S405, the start port buffer is used. The value (“1” or “2”) is referred to, but in the process of step S239, the variable special figure designation buffer value (“1” or “2”) may be referred to.

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 displays the special figure based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation and the special figure display result determination table set in step S239. The result is determined (step S240). In the process of step S240, the CPU 103, as in step S406 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. 16, shows the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 and the special figure display result set in step S239. In the decision table data, determine the special figure display result (whether "big hit" or "lost") by comparing each judgment value assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" one by one. do it.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S240, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S240 is “big hit” (step S241). If it is determined in step S241 that the game is a “hit” (step S241; YES), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the on state (step S242). Note that the big hit flag is cleared (reset) to the off state in the big hit end process of step S117. Following the process of step S242, the CPU 103 executes a jackpot type determination process (S244). The jackpot type determination process in step S244 is the same as the jackpot type determination process executed in step S407 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. Following the jackpot type determination process of step S244, the CPU 103 stores the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, for example, corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S244. A jackpot type buffer value is set (step S245). That is, what is the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process in step S244 is stored. As an example, if the big hit type determined in the big hit type determination process in step S244 is “16R probability variable big hit”, the CPU 103 sets “1” in the big hit type buffer value, and if “8R probability variable big hit”, the big hit type Set “2” to the buffer value.

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241 (NO)), or after executing the process of step S245, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, Sets a special special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state is set (step S248). Following the process of step S248, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and ends the special symbol normal process.

  When it is determined in step S235 that the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; YES), the demonstration display setting (step S250) is executed, and the special symbol is executed. Normal processing ends. In the demonstration display setting in step S250, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In contrast, it is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process (step S111). In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S250). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” in the special symbol normal process (step S110). When it is determined that the big hit flag is on (step S250; YES), an effect control command (display result designation command) corresponding to the big hit type determined in step S244 (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) is displayed. Transmission setting is performed (step S251). When it is determined that the big hit flag is not in the on state (step S250; NO), the transmission control of the effect control command (display result designation command) indicating the loss is performed (step S252).

  After executing the process of step S251 or the process of step S252, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base state is set (step S253). If it is determined in step S253 that the current state is not the high base state (step S253; NO), the CPU 103 sets (selects) the variation base determination table data for the low base state according to the special figure display result ( Step S254). Specifically, if the CPU 103 determines in step S250 that the big hit flag is not in the on state, the CPU 103 determines the change category determination table for low base / losing (the change category determination shown in FIG. 20A). Table) is set, and when it is determined in step S250 that the big hit flag is on, the variation category determination table for low base / big hit (shown in FIG. 20C) Table data constituting a variation category determination table) is set.

  If it is determined in step S253 that the state is the high base state (step S253; YES), the CPU 103 sets (selects) the variation base determination table data for the high base state according to the special figure display result ( Step S255). Specifically, if the CPU 103 determines in step S250 that the big hit flag is not in the on state, the CPU 103 determines the change category determination table for high base / losing (the change category determination shown in FIG. 20B). Table) is set, and if it is determined in step S250 that the big hit flag is on, the variation category determination table for high base / big hit (shown in FIG. 20D) Table data constituting a variation category determination table) is set.

  After executing the process of step S254 or the process of step S255, the CPU 103 determines the variation category based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category (step S256). Specifically, the CPU 103 stores the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation category stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation, and the number of storages of the variable category determination table data set in step S254 or step S255. It is sufficient to determine a variation category that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 by comparing with the determination value.

  As an example, when the table data constituting the variable category determination table of FIG. 20A is set in step S254 and the number of reserved memories is “0” or “1” (the reserved memory relating to the winning) CPU 103 determines that when the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is in the range of “0” to “69”, the variable category “ PA2 "is determined. When the range is" 70 "to" 89 ", the variation category" PA3 "is determined. When the range is" 90 "to" 98 ", the variation category" PA4 "is determined. ”, The variable category“ PA5 ”is determined.

  When the table data constituting the variable category determination table of FIG. 20A is set in step S254 and the number of reserved memories is in the range of “2” or “3” (other than the reserved memory related to the winning) CPU 103 determines that the variation category “PA1” when the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is in the range of “0” to “3”. When the range is “4” to “79”, the variation category “PA2” is determined. When the range is “80” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined, and “97” to “97” When it is within the range of “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined, and when it is “99”, the variation category “PA5” is determined.

  In the case where the table data constituting the variable category determination table of FIG. If there are four), the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA1” when the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is in the range of “0” to “63”, and “64”. To “79”, the variation category “PA2” is determined. Sometimes the variation category “PA4” is determined, and when it is “99”, the variation category “PA5” is determined.

  When the table data constituting the variation category determination table of FIG. 20C is set in step S254, the CPU 103 sets a numerical value indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category regardless of the number of reserved storage. When the data is in the range of “0” to “9”, the variation category “PB1” is determined. When the data is in the range of “10” to “59”, the variation category “PB3” is determined, and “60” to “ When it is within the range of “89”, the variation category “PB4” is determined, and when within the range of “90” to “99”, the variation category “PB5” is determined.

  The same applies to the case where the variation category determination table of FIG. 20B or the table data constituting the variation category determination table of FIG. 20D is set in step S255.

  Subsequent to step S256, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern based on the variation category determined in step S256 and the random number MR5 for variation pattern determination (step S257). In the process of step S257, the CPU 103 sets (selects) a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category determined in step S256, and the numerical data indicating the variation pattern random number MR5 is displayed as any variation pattern. The variation pattern may be determined based on whether the range is within the range.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table. In the process of step S257, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA2” in step S256, the CPU 103 sets a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category “PA2” shown in FIG. When the numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is in the range of “0” to “39”, the variation pattern “PA2-1” is determined, and the range of “40” to “99” is selected. When it is, the variation pattern “PA2-2” is determined. For example, if the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA3” in step S256, the CPU 103 sets (selects) the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category “PA3” shown in FIG. When the numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is in the range of “0” to “79”, the variation pattern “PA3-1” is determined, and when it is in the range of “80” to “99”, the variation is determined. The pattern “PA3-2” is determined. The same applies when another variable category is determined in step S256.

  Note that the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted at the time of execution of the processing, or step S217 of the start winning process (step S208, step S211) as in the case of the random value MR3 for determining the variation category. May be extracted and stored as pending data, and read at step S232 (or step S236) of the special symbol normal process (step S110).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S257, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern (step S258). In addition to the variation pattern designation command, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a first variation start command for designating the start of the first special figure game (or a second variation start command for designating the start of the second special figure game). May be performed. Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a special figure fluctuation time timer value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 (step S259), and the value of the special figure process flag. Is updated to “2” corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S260), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S260, the special symbol variation process is executed when the next timer interruption occurs.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process (step S113). In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 22, first, the CPU 103 stops the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and stops (displays) the fixed special symbol. After that, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” in the special symbol normal process (step S110). When it is determined that the big hit flag is in the on state (step S291; YES), the CPU 103 sets a big hit start time waiting time (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit start presentation waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command is stored in the buffer specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It only has to be stored in the area. Subsequent to the process of step S293, the CPU 103 sets the low probability and low base state (step S294). In the processing of step S294, for example, the CPU 103 may clear and set the high-accuracy flag and the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the off state, respectively. Note that the processing in step S294 may be omitted when the low probability and low base state has already been reached. Following the process of step S294, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the pre-hit release process (step S295), and ends the special symbol stop process.

  When it is determined in step S291 that the big hit flag is not in the on state (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs a gaming state transition process during variation (step S296). For example, the CPU 103 executes the following processing as the gaming state transition processing at the time of change. First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the low probability low base state, and if not, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the value of the variation counter. The variation counter is the number of executions of the special figure game after being controlled to the low probability low base state, and is the number of times compared with the ST number (probability variation number) and the short time number. The ST count (number of times of probability change) is the number of executions of the variable display game that executes the probability change control. The number of time reductions is the number of executions of the variable display game that executes time reduction control. The ST number (probability variation number) and the time reduction number are set in the big hit end process (step S117). The CPU 103 which added 1 to the value of the fluctuation number counter compares the value of the fluctuation number counter after the addition of 1 with the ST number. If the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the ST number, the gaming state is less likely It is only necessary to set the base state and clear the set values of the ST count and the short time count to “0”. In the present embodiment, since the number of time reductions and the number of STs are the same (both are 70 times), the value of the variation counter after 1 addition may be compared with the number of time reductions. Further, when the number of time reductions and the number of STs are different, each may be individually compared. That is, the CPU 103 compares the value of the fluctuation number counter after 1 addition with the number of time reductions, and if the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the time reduction number, sets the low base state and sets the fluctuation number counter after 1 addition. If the value of the variation counter is larger than the ST count, the low probability state may be set.

  Subsequent to the change state gaming state transition process in step S296, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S297), and ends the special symbol stop process. To do.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit end process (step S117). In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the big hit release post-processing (step S116) shown in FIG. 13, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time is set. A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, the CPU 103 updates, for example, by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and whether the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined depending on whether or not.

  When it is determined in step S311 that the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed (step S311; NO), the CPU 103 ends the big hit end processing as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S311 that the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S311). S312). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the high probability state (probability change state) by turning on the high probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 (step S314). Next, the CPU 103 sets the high base provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the high base state, for example, by setting it to an on state (step S315). That is, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is set to a highly accurate and high base state by the processing of step S314 and step S315.

  Following the processing of step S315, the CPU 103 sets the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to 70 times (step S316) and sets the time reduction count to 70 times (step S317). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the value of the fluctuation number counter to be compared with the ST number and the short time number to “0” (step S318), clears (resets) the big hit flag to the off state (step S319), The value of the process flag is updated to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S320), and the jackpot end process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the setting value of the ST number (the number of times of probability variation) and the setting value of the time reduction number of 70 are set to the same value (both are 70 times). The number of times may be different from the set value of 70 times. In this embodiment, the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 16R probability change big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). However, the setting value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. In this embodiment, the setting value of the short time in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the short time in the case of 16R probability variation big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). The setting value for the number of time reductions may be different from the setting value for the number of time reductions in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. When the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1”, the CPU 103 determines that it is a 16R probability variable big hit, and when the jackpot type buffer value is “2”. May be determined to be an 8R probability variation big hit. If the setting value of the ST count (number of times of probability change) and the number of time reductions does not differ between the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the case of 16R probability variation big hit (when the same value is set), the process of step S312 (big hit type) The reading of the buffer value may be omitted.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in FIG.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and is mounted on the effect control board 12. Register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is not in the on state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed to wait.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  When it is determined in step S72 that the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S72; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the timer interrupt flag and turns it off (step S73). Command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  Subsequent to the command analysis processing in step S74, the effect control CPU 120 executes error notification processing (step S75). In the error notification process of step S75, for example, an error notification corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is performed for an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the winning opening using a magnet.

  Following the error notification process in step S75, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect control process processing (step S76). In the effect control process in step S76, various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 17, and the like) are used based on the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11. Judgment, determination, setting, etc. related to the production operation that was performed are performed.

  Subsequent to the effect control process in step S76, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect random number update process (step S77). In the effect random number update process in step S77, for example, at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. As an example, the effect control CPU 120 may update the numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  It has been described that the interrupt for receiving the effect control command and the like from the main board 11 on the side of the effect control board 12 is an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. However, the method for generating an interrupt for receiving a production control command or the like is not limited to the above. For example, an interrupt for receiving a presentation control command or the like may be generated by an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S74). In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). When it is determined that there is no received command (step S501; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the command analysis process.

  When it is determined in step S501 that there is a reception command (step S501; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reception command is a first start opening prize notification command (step S502). . The effect control CPU 120 may confirm the MODE data of the received command, for example, and specify the type of the received command (see FIG. 3).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the command is the first start opening prize notification command (step S502; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first reserved storage number notification waiting time (step S503). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a timer initial value set in advance as the reception waiting time for the first reserved memory number notification command in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the command is not the first start opening prize notification command (step S502; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a second start opening prize notification command. (Step S504). If it is determined in step S504 that the command is the second start opening prize notification command (step S504; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second reserved storage number notification waiting time (step S505). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a timer initial value, which is set in advance as a reception waiting time for the second reserved memory number notification command, in the command reception control timer.

  When it is determined in step S504 that the command is not the second start opening prize notification command (step S504; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). ). If it is determined in step S506 that the command is not a symbol designation command (step S506; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If it is determined in step S507 that the command is not a variable category command (step S507; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a first reserved memory number notification command (step S508). ). If it is determined in step S508 that the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; YES), for example, by initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer, the first pending storage count notification wait time Is cleared (step S509).

  When it is determined in step S508 that the command is not the first reserved memory number notification command (step S508; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command. (Step S510). If it is determined in step S510 that the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; YES), for example, by initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer, the second pending storage count notification waiting time Is cleared (step S511).

  If it is determined in step S506 that it is a symbol designation command (step S506 (YES)), if it is determined in step S507 that it is a variable category command (step S507 (YES)), step S503, step S505, After executing any of the processes of step S509 and step S511, the effect control CPU 120 sends the received command to an empty area in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B. Is stored in the empty area (step S512). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control has a case where the received command is the first start opening prize notification command or the start opening prize notification command immediately before the received command is the first start opening prize notification command. In the case (when the second start opening winning notification command is not received after receiving the first starting opening winning notification command), the received command is stored in an empty area in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A; When the received command is the second starting port winning notification command, or when the starting port winning notification command immediately before the received command is the second starting port winning notification command (the second starting port winning notification command is received) If the first start opening prize notification command has not been received after the first start winning prize received command buffer 194 is received. Stored in the free space in. Following the process of step S512, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  When it is determined in step S510 that the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step S510; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern designation command. (Step S513). When it is determined that it is a variation pattern designation command (step S513; YES), the effect control CPU 201 stores the variation pattern designation command in a variation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S515). . Following the process of step S515, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  If it is determined in step S513 that the received command is not a variation pattern designation command (step S513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings according to the other received commands (step S518). For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may analyze the gaming state designation command and specify the current gaming state. Following the process of step S518, the process returns to step S501.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the error notification process (step S75). In the error notification process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is an error notification period (step S141). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the notification control pattern corresponding to the error notification (which may be the same configuration as the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 9) is already set as the use pattern, If it is already set, it may be determined whether or not it is an error notification period based on the set contents (notification timing and the like) and the value of the effect control process timer.

  If it is not the error notification period in step S141 (step S141; NO), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a magnetic abnormality notification designation command has been received (step S142). If no magnetic abnormality notification designation command has been received (step S142; NO), the error notification processing is terminated.

  When the magnetic abnormality notification designation command is received in step S142 (step S142; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) error notification operation control in the uppermost layer (Z value = 0). (Step S143), the error notification process is terminated. Further, even when it is the error notification period in step S141 (step S141; YES), the error notification operation control is executed (continued) in the uppermost layer (Z value = 0) (step S143). The error notification process is terminated. Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control sets a notification control pattern corresponding to the error notification of the magnetic abnormality as a usage pattern, and displays a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set notification control pattern. An error notification image (FIG. 27 (A), FIG. 27 (B), FIG. 28 (A)) corresponding to a magnetic abnormality error notification is displayed by transmitting it to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of Z values and the like of various images. FIG. 27A is a diagram illustrating an image (image name) and an image size (image display area) corresponding to each effect, notification, and the like executed in the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 27A, when error notification is executed, an error notification image having an image size of “large” is displayed in the display area. In other words, error notification is executed using an error notification image having an image size “large”. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 27A, the effect execution notification is executed using the effect execution notification image of the image size “small”, and the effect effect effect image of the image size “large” is used. An effect is executed, a display such as a hold (hold display, active display) is executed using a display image such as a hold of an image size “small”, and a group notice effect is executed using a group notice effect image of an image size “large” Then, the chance zone effect is executed using the chance zone effect image having the image size “small”, and the step-up notification effect is executed using the step-up notice effect image having the image size “large”.

  The effect execution notification shown in FIG. 27A is notification that the notification target effect has been executed. In the present embodiment, step 5 (SU5) of the step-up notice effect, the group notice effect, and the accessory effect each correspond to the notification target effect. That is, in this embodiment, as the effect execution notification, when SU5 is executed, the fact that SU5 is executed is notified, and when the group notice effect is executed, the fact that the group notice effect is executed is notified. In the case where the accessory effect is executed, the fact that the accessory effect has been executed is notified.

  FIG. 27B is a diagram illustrating the Z value set for each image shown in FIG. The RAM 122 stores a Z value setting table in which the Z value of each image shown in FIG. In the Z value setting table, as shown in FIG. 27B, the Z value of each image is set. The Z value indicates a layer for displaying an image. The smaller the Z value, the more the image is displayed on the front side (front side, upper side) layer in the depth direction. The higher the Z value, the rear side (back side, lower side) in the depth direction. An image is displayed on the layer. Therefore, for example, in FIG. 27B, when the error notification image with the Z value “0” and the chance zone effect image with the Z value “7” are displayed in a superimposed manner, the chance with the Z value “7” is displayed. An error notification image having a Z value “0” is displayed in front of the zone effect image. In addition, for example, when a group notice effect image with a Z value “6”, a chance zone effect image with a Z value “7”, and a step-up notice effect image with a Z value “8” are displayed in a superimposed manner, the Z value A chance zone effect image with a Z value of “7” is displayed in front of the step-up notice effect image with “8”, and a group notice effect image with a Z value of “6” is displayed in front of the chance zone effect image with a Z value of “7”. Is displayed. Note that the above-described images and Z values are examples. For example, the Z value of the decorative design (image of the variable display effect of the decorative design) is “9”, and the Z value of the background (background image) is “10”.

  Note that the Z value of the effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 27B starts when the number of notifications is 3 (when execution of three effects of SU5, group notice effect, and accessory effect is notified). When the order is third, the notification start order is 2 when the number of notifications is 2 or more (when the execution of two or more effects of SU5, group notice effect, and accessory effect is notified). When the number is “2”, the notification start order is first when the number of notifications is 1 or more (when the execution of one or more of the SU5, group notice effect, and accessory effect is notified). Sometimes “3”.

  28 and 29 are diagrams illustrating examples of various images. FIG. 28A shows an error notification image (an example). The error notification image shown in FIG. 28A includes a pictogram image G1 for notifying that an error has occurred, and a character image G2 for notifying a message “Error has occurred! Please call a staff member”. The error notification image display time (error notification notification time) may be, for example, 30 seconds. The display time of the error notification image may be varied depending on the type of error.

  The image size of the error notification image shown in FIG. 27A is a display area obtained by combining the display area of the pictogram image G1 and the display area of the character image G2. That is, the display area combining the display area of the pictogram image G1 and the display area of the character image G2 is “large”. The pictogram image G1 and the character image G2 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 28A, but are compared with other plural images (or not compared with other plural images), and are images of error notification images. Anything that can be said to be “large” in size is acceptable. Note that an image whose image size falls within the upper predetermined range (for example, the fourth) may be referred to as an image size “large”, and an image that does not enter the upper predetermined range may be referred to as an image size “small”. In addition, an image whose ratio of the image size in the display area of the image display device 5 is a predetermined ratio (for example, 30%) or more is referred to as an image size “large”, and an image less than the predetermined ratio is referred to as an image size “small”. Good.

  FIG. 28B shows an effect execution notification image (an example). The effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 28B is a pictogram image G3 that notifies the executed notification target effect (step 5 of the step-up notice effect, SU group notice effect, and accessory effect) in an identifiable manner. Contains. The pictogram image G3 is a general term for a part or all of the pictogram image G3-1 to the pictogram image G3-3 (described later). For example, the display time of the effect execution notification image (the notification time of the effect execution notification) may be 20 seconds. Depending on the type of notification target effect, the display time of the effect execution notification image may be varied.

  The image size of the effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 27A is the display area of the pictogram image G3. That is, the display area of the pictogram image G3 is “small”. The pictogram image G3 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 28B, and the image size of the effect execution notification image is “compared with other plural images (or not compared with other plural images)”. Anything that can be said to be small is acceptable.

  FIG. 28 (D) shows in detail the vicinity of the pictogram image G3 of FIG. 28 (B). In FIG. 28 (D), the pictogram image G3-1 notifies the first effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 3, and the Z value is “3”. In FIG. 28D, pictogram image G3-2 notifies the second effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 3, and the Z value is “2”. In FIG. 28 (D), pictogram image G3-3 notifies the third effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 3, and the Z value is “1”. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 28D, a pictogram image G3-2 having a Z value “2” is displayed in front of a pictogram image G3-1 having a Z value “3”, and a pictogram image G3 having a Z value “2” is displayed. A pictogram image G3-3 having a Z value “1” is displayed on the front side of -2.

  In FIG. 28 (E), the pictogram image G3-1 notifies the first effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 2, and the Z value is “3”. In FIG. 28 (E), the pictogram image G3-2 notifies the second effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 2, and the Z value is “2”. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 28E, a pictogram image G3-2 having a Z value “2” is displayed in front of the pictogram image G3-1 having a Z value “3”. In FIG. 28 (F), pictogram image G3-1 notifies the first effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 1, and the Z value is “3”.

  FIG. 28C shows an accessory effect effect image (an example). The effect effect effect image shown in FIG. 28C includes an effect image G4 that gives a video effect to an effect effect (specifically, movement (downward movement) of the movable accessory 17). The display time of the effect effect effect image (execution time of the effect effect effect) may be, for example, 30 seconds. Depending on the operation mode of the movable accessory 17, the display time of the accessory effect effect image may be varied.

  The image size of the effect effect effect image shown in FIG. 27A is the display area of the effect image G4. That is, the display area of the effect image G4 is “large”. The effect image G4 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 28C, and the image size of the effect effect effect image is compared with other images (or not compared with other images). Anything can be said to be “large”.

  FIG. 29A shows a display image (one example) such as hold. The hold display image shown in FIG. 29A includes a first hold display image G5, a second hold display image G6, and an active display image G7. The display time of the first hold display image G5 and the second hold display image G6 varies depending on the number of hold displays, the digestion time of each hold display (the display time of each variable display), and the like. The display time of the active display image G7 varies depending on the display time of variable display. Note that the display image such as the hold may include an image showing the active display area AHA.

  The image size of the hold display image shown in FIG. 27A is a display area obtained by combining the display area of the first hold display image G5, the display area of the second hold display image G6, and the display area of the active display image G7. It is. That is, the display area including the display area of the first hold display image G5, the display area of the second hold display image G6, and the display area of the active display image G7 is “small”. The first hold display image G5, the second hold display image G6, and the active display image G7 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 29A, and are compared with other multiple images (or with other multiple images). It is sufficient that the image size of the display image such as the hold can be said to be “small” without comparison.

  FIG. 29B shows a group notice effect image (an example). The group notice effect image shown in FIG. 29B includes a character image G8 constituting the group. The display time of the character image G8 (group notice effect execution time) may be, for example, 5 seconds. Depending on the character image G8 displayed in the group notice effect, the display time of the group notice effect image may be varied.

  The image size of the group notice effect image shown in FIG. 27B is the display area of the character image G8. That is, the display area of the character image G8 is “large”. The character image G8 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 29B, and the image size of the group notice effect image is “compared with other images (or not compared with other images)”. Anything that can be said to be “large” is acceptable.

  FIG. 29C shows a chance zone effect image (an example). The chance zone effect image shown in FIG. 29C includes a character image G9 for informing a message “chance !!” and a pictogram image G10 for informing that it is a chance. The chance zone effect image may include one of the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10. The display time of character image G9 and pictogram image G10 (execution time of chance zone effect) varies depending on the number of hold displays, the digestion time of each hold display (the display time of each variable display), and the like.

  The image size of the chance zone effect image shown in FIG. 27B is a display area that combines the display area of the character image G9 and the display area of the pictogram image G10. That is, the display area combining the display area of the character image G9 and the display area of the pictogram image G10 is “small”. The character image G9 and the pictogram image G10 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 29C, but are compared with other images (or without being compared with other images), Any image size can be said to be “small”.

  FIG. 29D shows a step-up notice effect image (an example). The step-up notice effect image is a frame image G11 that is displayed last in step 1 (SU1), a frame image G12 that is displayed last in step 2 (SU2), a frame image G13 that is displayed last in step 3 (SU3), a step 4 (SU4) includes a frame image G14 that is displayed last, step 5 (SU5) includes a frame image G15 that is displayed last. That is, the display area is enlarged every time the step-up is performed. In the frame images G11 to G15, characters and the like are displayed according to SU1 to SU5, but are not shown. Note that the display time of each of the frame images G11 to G15 may be, for example, 1 second (thus, for example, 5 seconds when proceeding to SU5).

  The image size of the step-up notice effect image shown in FIG. 27B is based on the display area of the frame image G15. That is, the display area of the frame image G15 is “large”. The frame image G15 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 29D, and the image size of the step-up notice effect image is compared with other plural images (or not compared with other plural images). Anything can be said to be “large”.

  FIG. 30 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing layers of various images. In FIG. 30, the numbers on the Z axis are Z values. According to the setting of the Z value shown in FIG. 27B, as shown in FIG. 30, the error notification image having the Z value “0” is displayed on the foremost layer, and the effect having the Z value “1”. The execution notification image (third) is displayed on one layer behind the error notification image, and the effect execution notification image (second) having the Z value “2” is displayed on the back of one of the effect execution notification images (third). The effect execution effect image having the Z value “4” is displayed on the layer immediately behind the effect execution notification image (second) displayed on the layer and having the Z value “3”. The image is displayed on one layer behind the effect execution notification image (third), and the hold display image having the Z value “5” is displayed on one layer behind the effect effect effect image. The group notice effect image having “6” is one of the display images of the hold etc. A chance zone effect image having a Z value “7” is displayed on one layer behind the group notice effect image, and a step-up notice effect image having a Z value “8” is displayed on the layer of the group notice effect image. One layer is displayed on the back layer.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. 31A shows the display operation in the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the step-up notice effect (SU4), the chance zone effect, the group notice effect, the hold display, and the effect execution notification (group notice effect) overlap. An example is shown. FIG. 31B shows a step-up notice effect (SU5), a chance zone effect, a group notice effect, a hold display, an effect effect effect, an effect execution notice (SU5), an effect execution notice (group notice effect), and an effect execution. The example of a display operation in the image display apparatus 5 when the execution period of alerting | reporting (object effect) overlaps is shown. As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, an image having a large Z value is drawn on the back side according to the Z value in FIG. 27B, and an image having a small Z value is on the near side. It is drawn to overlap.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S76). In the effect control process shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (step S150). In the winning effect determining process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer (the first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B). As a received command, a process for determining whether or not a start opening prize notification command has been received, a process for determining an effect such as holding, etc. are executed.

  Subsequent to the winning effect determination process (step S150), the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the processes of steps S170 to 177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like. And run.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is an initial value. The variable display start waiting process displays an image based on whether a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the apparatus 5. In the variable display start waiting process, when it is determined to start the variable display of decorative symbols (that is, when a variation pattern designation command or the like is received), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B (for example, setting for performing variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 (for example, , Processing for performing an effect control pattern corresponding to a fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation time), a value of a fluctuation time timer, etc.) and a display operation such as a first hold display, a second hold display, and an active display This includes processing for performing setting (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to the display operation). In the variable display start setting process, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect process, whether or not the variable time timer set in the variable display start setting process (step S171) has timed out (the elapsed time after the variable display start of the decorative pattern in the image display device 5 is the special figure variable time) And the like. In the effect processing during variable display, when the variable time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The special symbol waiting process is executed when the confirmed decorative symbol is “losing”, when the game state setting process at the time of setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, or when the fixed decorative symbol is “big hit” The process to be executed includes a process for making a setting for performing a fanfare effect (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect). In the waiting process per special figure, when the confirmed decorative symbol is “losing”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value, and when the confirmed decorative symbol is “big hit”, Update the value to “4”.

  The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The jackpot start process is a process for determining whether or not a big prize opening notification command is received, and a process that is executed when a big prize opening notification command is received (a special variable prize in each round). This includes a process for performing settings for performing an effect performed when the ball device 7 is in the open state (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during opening). In the big hit starting process, when the big prize opening opening notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The in-round process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. The in-round process is a process for determining whether or not a notification command after opening the big winning opening is received, or a process to be executed when the notification command after opening the big winning opening is received (a special variable prize in each round). This includes a process for performing settings for performing an effect performed when the ball device 7 is in the closed state (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during closing). In the in-round processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” when the notification command after the special winning opening is received is received.

  The round post-process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. Post-round processing is performed as a process for determining whether or not a winning prize opening notification command or a winning end designation command has been received, or a process to be executed when a winning prize opening notification command is received. Setting for performing an ending effect (for example, for an ending effect), for example, a process for performing a setting (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to an effect during opening) or a process to be executed when a hit end designation command is received. For example, setting a corresponding production control pattern and ending production execution time timer value). In the round post-processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” when a notification command during opening of a special winning opening is received, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7” when a winning end designation command is received. To do.

  The process after the big hit in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. Whether the ending effect execution time timer set in the post-round processing (step S176) has timed out or not (whether the elapsed time after the start of execution of the ending effect in the image display device 5 has reached the set time) No.) and a process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a highly accurate base state as a process to be executed when the ending effect execution time timer times out (provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191) And a process for setting the ST count and the number of time reductions. In the post-hit end processing, when the ending effect execution time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of winning effect determination processing (S150). In the winning effect determining process shown in FIG. 33, the effect control CPU 120 first stores the stored contents in the starting winning reception command buffer (first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or second starting winning reception command buffer 194B). Is checked (step S151), and it is determined whether or not a first start opening winning designation command is received as a new received command (step S152). When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening prize designation command has not been received (step S152; NO), the effect control CPU 120 checks the stored contents in the second start prize receiving command buffer 194B ( In step S153), it is determined whether or not a second start port winning designation command is received as a new received command (step S153). When it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S154; NO), the winning effect determining process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning designation command is received (step S152; YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time-short state (highly accurate high-base state) is established (step S152). When it is determined that the time is not short (step S155: NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes effect determination processing such as hold (step S160A). In the effect determination process such as hold in step S160A, a process of determining the display mode of the first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL (specifically, the effect such as hold in the first start prize storage display area 5HL) is determined. A process for determining whether or not to execute, and a process for determining an effect pattern such as a hold when it is determined to be executed). Details will be described later.

  After executing the effect determination process such as hold (step S160A), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the effect determination process such as hold (step S160B). Specifically, for example, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the effect such as hold in the effect determination process such as hold in step S160A, it uses the effect pattern such as hold determined in the effect determination process such as hold in step S160A. The information indicating the display mode (that is, the display mode after addition and the display mode after each shift specified by the effect pattern such as the hold) corresponds to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is stored in association with the buffer number. Further, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the hold or other effect in the hold and other effect determining process in step S160A, a normal display mode (for example, white) is added as the display mode at the time of addition and after each shift. ) Is stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A.

  After executing the process of step S160B, the effect control CPU 120 executes a chance zone effect determination process (step S161A), and stores the determination details of the chance zone effect (step S161B). Details of the chance zone effect determination process will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S161B, the CPU 120 for effect control adds a first hold display based on the determination content stored in step S160B (step S162). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control executes (starts) the operation control for adding the first hold display to the first start winning storage display area 5HL in the sixth layer (Z value = 5) from the top. More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display in the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C described above in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. An effect control pattern to be displayed is set as a use pattern, and a display control command specified by display control data included in the set effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. A display image (FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 29A) to which the first hold display is added is displayed. Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command is received (step S154; YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a time-short state (highly accurate high base state) (step S156). When it is determined that the time is short (highly accurate and high base state) (step S156: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes effect determination processing such as hold (step S163A). The effect determination process such as hold in step S163A is the same as the effect determination process such as hold in step S160A. That is, in the effect determination processing such as hold in step S163A, a process for determining the display mode of the second hold display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR (specifically, hold in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, etc.) A process for determining whether or not to execute the effect, and a process for determining an effect pattern such as a hold when it is determined to be executed).

  After executing the effect determination process such as holding (step S163A), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of step S163B, step S164A, step S164B, and step S165, and ends the winning effect determination process. It should be noted that the processes of Step S163B, Step S164A, Step S164B, and Step S165 related to the second start opening prize are the same as the processes of Step S160B, Step S161A, Step S161B, and Step S162 related to the first start opening prize, respectively. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  When it is determined in step S155 that the time is short (step S155: YES), or when it is determined in step S156 that the time is not short (step S156: NO), a holding addition process according to the start opening prize designation is executed. (S166). Specifically, when the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S152: YES, step S155: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect such as hold in the effect determination process such as hold in step S160A. As in the case where it is determined not to be stored, information indicating a normal display mode (for example, white) is stored as a display mode at the time of addition and after each shift, and the first hold display displayed in the normal display mode is first started. It adds to the winning memory display area 5HL. Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S154: YES, step S156: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the hold etc. effect in the effect determination process such as hold in step S163A. As in the case of the above, the information indicating the normal display mode (for example, white) is stored as the display mode after addition and after each shift, and the second hold display displayed in the normal display mode is displayed as the second start-winning memory display. Add to area 5HR. Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect determination process (steps S160A and S163A) such as hold. FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process such as hold. In the effect determination processing such as hold shown in FIG. 34A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a plurality of types of hold execution execution determination table (non-specific pattern (loss) hold etc.) stored in the ROM 121. Production execution presence / absence decision table, production execution presence / absence decision table such as hold for specific pattern (losing), production execution presence / absence decision table such as hold for non-specific pattern (big hit), production execution existence decision such as hold for specific pattern (big hit) Select a table to determine whether or not to perform an effect such as hold according to the variable category command (non-specific pattern (losing), specific pattern (losing), non-specific pattern (big hit), specific pattern (big hit)) from the table) Is set (step S9000).

  FIG. 34 (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of whether or not an effect such as holding is executed. According to the example shown in FIG. 34B, it is determined whether or not execution of an effect such as a hold is performed based on the variable category command. That is, when the pattern is a non-specific pattern (losing), non-execution is determined at a rate of 90%, and execution is determined at a rate of 10%. In the case of a specific pattern (losing), execution non-execution is determined at a rate of 70%, and execution presence is determined at a rate of 30%. When it is a non-specific pattern (big hit), non-execution is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution is determined at a rate of 40%. When it is a specific pattern (big hit), non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution is determined at a rate of 80%.

  In the table for determining whether or not to execute the hold etc., each of “no execution” and “execution” is determined in the ratio shown in FIG. Each is assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to perform the performance such as holding. For example, in the determination execution presence / absence determination table for non-specific pattern (losing), “no execution” is determined at a rate of 90%, and “execution is” is determined at a rate of 10%. A numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining whether or not to execute an effect such as holding is assigned to each of “no execution” and “execution performed”. In the determination execution presence / absence determination table for a specific pattern (losing), “not executed” is determined at a rate of 70% and “executed” is determined at a rate of 30%. And “execution present” are assigned numerical values to be compared with a random number value for determining whether or not to execute such as holding. In the non-specific pattern (big hit) pending execution execution determination table, “No execution” is determined at a rate of 60%, and “Execution” is determined at a rate of 40%. ”And“ execution present ”are assigned numerical values to be compared with random values for determining whether or not to execute such as holding. In the table for determining whether or not to execute a holding effect for a specific pattern (big hit), “not executed” is determined at a rate of 20% and “executed” is determined at a rate of 80%. And “execution present” are assigned numerical values to be compared with a random number value for determining whether or not to execute such as holding. Note that the random number value for determining whether execution such as holding is performed may be updated, for example, in the rendering random number update process (step S77).

  Subsequent to the process of step S9000, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an effect such as holding based on a random number value for determining whether or not to execute an effect such as holding (step S9001). That is, the effect control CPU 120 includes numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute an effect such as holding, and a determination value of “not executed” or “executed” in the determination table for determining whether or not an effect is executed such as holding in step S9000. To determine whether or not to execute an effect such as hold.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9001, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the effect such as holding (step S9002). When it is determined to execute an effect such as a hold (step S9002; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of reserved memories (a prize is held) from among a plurality of types of hold etc. effect pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 121. An on-holding effect pattern determination table corresponding to the variable category command and the variable category command is selected and set (step S9003). That is, when the winning control is the first hold (the first hold in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the first hold in the second start winning memory display area 5HR). An effect pattern determination table for the first hold, etc. is set, and the second prize is held (the second hold in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the second hold in the second start winning memory display area 5HR) In the case of the second), an effect pattern determination table for the second hold is set, and the third pay is held (the third hold in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the second start) If the winning memory display area 5HR is the third hold), an effect pattern determination table for the third hold is set, and the fourth winning is the first hold (first start winning memory display error). Hold 4 th in A 5HL, or sets a hold like effect pattern determination table for holding a fourth point when a hold 4 th) in the second start winning storage display area 5HR.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S9003, the CPU 120 for effect control determines an effect pattern such as hold based on a random value for determining an effect pattern such as hold (step S9004). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 compares the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the effect pattern such as the hold and the determination value of each effect pattern such as the hold in the hold effect pattern determination table set in step S9003. Then, the one hold etc. production pattern is determined. Then, the effect determination process such as hold is ended. Note that the random number value for determining the production pattern such as the hold may be updated in the production random number update process (step S77), for example.

  On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute an effect such as a hold (step S9002; NO), the effect control CPU 120 displays white ( A normal display mode is determined (step S9005). Then, the effect determination process such as hold is ended.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a production pattern such as a hold. FIG. 35 (A) shows an effect pattern (an example) for a hold determined by a hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third hold. That is, when it is determined that an effect such as a hold is to be executed in the effect determination process such as a hold executed when the winning is the third hold (step S9002; YES), a plurality of holds shown in FIG. One effect pattern such as hold is determined from among the effect patterns (such as hold effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14”).

  In FIG. 35A, “display mode of hold display at third hold position” in the figure is a display mode of hold display at a position after the additional display to before the first shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at the position three times before the first start winning memory display area 5HL, or the second hold at the position three times before the second start winning memory display area 5HR. It is a display mode of display. The “display mode of the hold display at the second hold position” in the figure is a display mode of the hold display at the position after the first shift and before the second shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at the position before the second digestion in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, or the second hold at the position before the second digest in the second start prize memory display area 5HR. It is a display mode of display. The “display mode of the hold display at the first hold position” in the figure is the display mode of the hold display at the position after the second shift to before the third shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at the position immediately before the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the second hold at the position immediately before the second start winning memory display area 5HR. It is a display mode of display.

  In FIG. 35 (A), for example, an effect pattern “HP1” such as hold indicates white as a hold display at the third hold position, displays white as a hold display at the second hold position, and holds 1 This is an effect pattern such as hold, in which white is displayed as the hold display at the position of the first position, and yellow is displayed as the active display. The production pattern “HP2” such as hold displays white as a hold display at the third hold position, displays white as a hold display at the second hold position, and yellow as a hold display at the first hold position. Is an effect pattern such as hold, in which yellow is displayed as the active display. The production pattern “HP3” such as hold displays white as a hold display at the third hold position, displays yellow as a hold display at the second hold position, and yellow as a hold display at the first hold position. Is an effect pattern such as hold, in which yellow is displayed as the active display. The on hold etc. production patterns “HP4” to “HP14” are also as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 35 (A) shows an effect pattern such as hold determined by the hold third effect pattern determination table for the third hold, but the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the first hold. Reservation etc. production pattern determined, hold etc. production pattern determined by hold 2nd hold production pattern determination table, etc. The same applies to the pattern.

  For example, the hold etc. production pattern determined by the hold 1st hold etc. production pattern determination table is “the display mode of the hold display at the first hold position” and “the display mode of the hold display of the active display”. It is sufficient if is set. The production pattern for holding, etc. determined by the second holding pattern display table for holding, etc. is “the display mode of the hold display at the second position of the hold” and “the display mode of the hold display at the first position of the hold”. ”And“ display mode of active display hold display ”may be set. The presentation pattern for holding, etc. determined by the fourth holding pattern display table for holding, etc. is “the display mode of the hold display at the fourth position of the hold” and “the display mode of the hold display at the third position of the hold”. ”,“ Display mode of hold display at the second position of hold ”,“ display mode of hold display at the first position of hold ”, and“ display mode of hold display of active display ” That's fine.

  FIG. 35 (B) is an example of a determination ratio of an effect pattern such as a hold by a hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third hold. According to the example shown in FIG. 35 (B), an effect such as a hold according to a change category command (non-specific pattern (losing), specific pattern (losing), non-specific pattern (big hit), specific pattern (big hit)). Pattern decision rate is different. It should be noted that, in the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third hold, one of the hold etc. effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14” is displayed according to the variable category command. ) Are compared with random numbers (not shown) for determining an effect pattern for holding, etc. for each of the effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14” for holding, etc., according to the variation category command. It is only necessary that a numerical value (determination value) to be assigned is assigned.

  For example, in the table to be referred to when the pattern is a specific pattern (losing), each of the on-hold effect patterns “HP1” to “HP4” is determined at a rate of 23%, and the on-hold effect patterns “HP5” to “HP12”. It is only necessary that a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining an effect pattern for holding, etc. is assigned to each effect pattern for holding, etc. so that each of the effects is determined at a rate of 1%. . In addition, in the table to be referred to when the pattern is a non-specific pattern (big hit), each of the on-hold effect patterns “HP1” to “HP4” is determined at a rate of 20%, and the on-hold effect patterns “HP5” to “HP14” are determined. If a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining an effect pattern for holding, etc. is assigned to each effect pattern for holding, etc. Good.

  It should be noted that the determination ratio of the production pattern such as the hold by the production pattern determination table for the first hold, the determination ratio of the production pattern such as the hold by the production pattern determination table for the second hold, etc. The ratio of determination of the effect pattern for the hold by the effect pattern determination table for the hold, etc. is omitted, but it is the fourth hold and the third hold when both the first hold and the third hold. As in the case of, one of the hold and other effect patterns may be determined.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the chance zone effect determination process (steps S161A and S164A). FIG. 36A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the chance zone effect determination process. In the chance zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 36A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning is the third or fourth prize (step S9010). When it is determined that the winning is not the third or fourth (step S9010; NO), that is, when the winning is the first or second, the chance zone effect determining process is terminated.

  When it is determined that the winning is the third or fourth (step S9010; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the chance zone effect period (the period during which the chance zone effect is being executed). (Step S9011). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect is already set as the use pattern, and if it is already set as the use pattern, the set contents (execution timing etc. ) And the value of the effect control process timer, it may be determined whether or not it is a chance zone effect period. If it is determined that it is the chance zone effect period (step S9011; YES), the chance zone effect determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined that it is not the chance zone effect period (step S9011; NO), the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the chance zone effect (the state that the chance zone effect has been executed but has not been executed yet). ) Is determined (step S9012). For example, the effect control CPU 120 has information (described later) indicating that it is the target of the chance zone effect in association with any buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D). It may be determined whether or not the chance zone effect execution has been determined based on whether or not it has already been stored. If it is determined that the chance zone effect execution has been determined (step S9012; YES), the chance zone effect determination process ends.

  When it is determined that the chance zone effect execution execution has not been determined (step S9012; NO), the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of types of chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination tables (non-specific patterns (lost)) chances. Zone effect execution presence / absence determination table, chance pattern effect execution determination table for specific pattern (losing), chance zone effect execution determination determination table for non-specific pattern (big hit), chance zone effect execution presence / absence for specific pattern (big hit) A decision table for determining whether or not to perform a chance zone effect according to a variation category command (non-specific pattern (losing), specific pattern (losing), non-specific pattern (big hit), specific pattern (big hit)) Select and set (Step S 013).

  FIG. 36B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the chance zone effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 36B, whether or not to execute the chance zone effect is determined based on the change category command. That is, when it is a non-specific pattern (losing), non-execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When it is a specific pattern (losing), non-execution is determined at a rate of 95%, and execution is determined at a rate of 5%. When it is a non-specific pattern (big hit), non-execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When it is a specific pattern (big hit), non-execution is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution is determined at a rate of 20%.

  In each chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table, “execution not performed” and “execution present” are determined at the ratios shown in FIG. Each is assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the chance zone effect execution determination. For example, in the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for a non-specific pattern (losing), “No Execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. A numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining whether or not to produce a zone effect is assigned. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for the specific pattern (losing), “not executed” is determined at a rate of 95%, and “executed” is determined at a rate of 5%. A numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the chance zone effect is assigned to each of “Execution status” and “Execution status”. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for non-specific pattern (big hit), the chance zone effect is set for each of “not executed” and “executed” so that “not executed” is determined at a rate of 100%. A numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining execution is assigned. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for a specific pattern (big hit), “not executed” is determined such that “not executed” is determined at a rate of 80% and “executed” is determined at a rate of 20%. A numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the chance zone effect is assigned to each of “Execution status” and “Execution status”. Note that the random number value for determining whether or not to perform the chance zone effect may be updated in the effect random number update process (step S77), for example.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9013, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance zone effect based on the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the chance zone effect (step S9014). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 includes numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the chance zone effect execution presence / absence, and a determination value of “no execution” or “execution present” in the chance zone effect execution determination table set in step S9013. To determine whether or not to execute the chance zone effect. Also, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the chance zone effect, the buffer of the first start winning reception command buffer 194A (or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B) that stores hold information of the current winning winning is stored. Information indicating that it is the target of the chance zone effect is stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C (or second prefetch notice buffer 194D) corresponding to the number. Then, the chance zone effect determination process ends.

  In the chance zone effect determining process shown in FIG. 36, when the winning is not the third or fourth (step S9010; NO), the chance zone effect is not executed, but the winning is the third or fourth. The chance zone effect may be executed even when it is not an eye. For example, when the winning is the first, the chance zone effect may be started from the target variation which is the next variation. If there is no winning while the target changes, the chance zone effect may end at the end of the target change. In addition, if there is a win while the target changes, the chance is unconditionally (or only when the expectation of the big hit of the change corresponding to the win is high) until the end of the change corresponding to the win The zone effect may be continued, or the chance zone effect may be ended at the end of the target change, as in the case where there is no winning during the target change.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is “lost” by reading the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. Is determined (step S522). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 is a first variable display result notification command for notifying that the variable display result notification command received in the variable display start waiting process in step S170 is “lost”. If there is, it is determined to be “lost”. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display result notification command received in the variable display start waiting process in step S170 is the second variable display result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is a 16R probability change big hit or variable display. If the result is the third variable display result notification command for notifying that the result is an 8R probability variation big hit, it is determined that it is not “lost”.

  When it is determined in step S522 that it is “losing” (step S522; YES), the effect control CPU 120 reads the EXT data specified by, for example, reading the EXT data in the change pattern specifying command transmitted from the main board 11. The pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative display variable display mode is “non-reach (loss)” (that is, “PA 1-1”, “PA 2-1”, “PA 2-2” in FIG. 5). It is determined whether or not (step S523).

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; YES), the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the non-reach combination (step S524). ). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols.

  Next, numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. Note that, in the process of step S524, a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined in response to the case where the change symbol notice is being executed.

  When it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the reach combination (step S525). . As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. In addition, by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table or the like, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  In addition, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value ( For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol, so that the confirmed decorative symbol does not become a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S522 that it is not “losing” (step S522; NO), that is, when it is “big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit)”, the effect control CPU 120 is a definite decoration constituting a big hit combination. A combination of symbols (final stop symbols) is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table, etc., the display is stopped and aligned in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. A decorative design having the same design number is determined.

  When determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols in step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines the big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit), the presence or absence of the promotion effect, and the like. The design may be determined.

  As a specific example, for example, a jackpot combination dedicated to 16R probability variation jackpot (for example, three odd-numbered identical decorative symbols arranged in parallel) and a jackpot combination dedicated to 8R probability variation jackpot (for example, an even number of identical ornamental symbols represent In the mode of 3), in the case of 16R probability variation big hit, either the big hit combination dedicated to 16R probability variation big hit or the big hit combination dedicated to 8R probability variation big hit may be determined as the fixed decorative design. . At this time, when the big hit combination dedicated to the 8R probability variable big hit is determined to be a confirmed decorative symbol, it is only necessary to notify the player that the 16R probability big hit is made until the end of the 8th round as the promotion effect. On the other hand, in the case of 8R probability variation big hit, it is only necessary to determine whether it is a big hit combination exclusively for 8R probability variation big hit as a definite decorative symbol.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (clash accuracy) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit (crash accuracy) is provided, a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit (crash accuracy) is used. You may decide.

  After performing any of the processes of step S524, step S525, and step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change is a chance zone change (step S529A). . For example, the effect control CPU 120 has already stored information indicating that it is a chance zone effect target in association with one of the buffer numbers of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D). Whether or not the change is a chance zone change may be determined based on whether or not the change is made.

  When it is determined in step S529A that the change is a chance zone change (step S529A; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect as a use pattern (step S529B). . In other words, when it is determined that the chance zone effect is to be executed in the chance zone effect determination process (FIG. 36) executed at the time of winning, and information indicating that it is a target is stored (step S9014), it is executed first thereafter. In the variable display start setting process, an effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect is set as a use pattern. Thus, when the chance zone effect is executed at the time of winning a prize, the chance zone effect is started from the next change (change first started after the winning).

  If it is determined in step S529A that the change is not a chance zone change (step S529A; NO), or after the process of step S529B is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes a step-up notice effect determination process (step S529A). S530A). In the step-up notice effect determining process, whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect (one aspect of the main notice effect) is determined, and when it is determined to execute the step-up notice effect, a step-up notice effect pattern is determined.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of whether or not to execute a main notice effect (step-up notice effect, group notice effect, etc.). FIG. 38A is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute a step-up notice effect. In FIG. 38A (the same applies to FIGS. 38B and 38C), the variation pattern “PA2-X” represents the variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-2”, and the variation pattern “PA3-X”. "Represents the variation patterns" PA3-1 "to" PA3-2 ", the variation pattern" PA4-X "represents the variation patterns" PA4-1 "to" PA4-3 ", and the variation pattern" PA5-X " "Represents the variation patterns" PA5-1 "to" PA5-3 ", the variation pattern" PB3-X "represents the variation patterns" PB3-1 "to" PB3-2 ", and the variation pattern" PB4-X " "Represents the variation patterns" PB4-1 "to" PB4-3 ", and the variation pattern" PB5-X "represents the variation patterns" PB5-1 "to" PB5-3 ".

  According to the example shown in FIG. 38A, whether or not the step-up notice effect is executed is determined based on the variation pattern. That is, when the variation pattern is “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “no execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. In the case of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-X”, execution non-execution is determined at a rate of 95% and execution presence is determined at a rate of 5%.

  When the fluctuation pattern is “PA3-X”, when the fluctuation pattern is “PB3-X”, when the fluctuation pattern is “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, or when the fluctuation pattern is “PB4-X” or The case of “PB5-X” is also as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, when determining whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect, for example, a variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “PA2-X”, “PA3- X, “PB3-X”, “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”) Store in the ROM 121.

  In each of the above-described step-up notice effect execution presence / absence determination tables, “execution not performed” and “execution present” are determined in the ratio of FIG. The numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect should be assigned to each of “. For example, in the step-up notice effect execution presence determination table for the variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “No execution” and “No execution” are determined so that “No execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute a step-up notice effect needs to be assigned to each of “executed”. Further, for example, in the step-up notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the variation pattern “PA2-X”, “not executed” is determined at a rate of 95%, and “executed” is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute a step-up notice effect needs to be assigned to each of “not executed” and “executed”. Note that the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect may be updated, for example, in the effect random number update process (step S77).

  FIG. 38B is an example of the determination ratio of the step-up notice effect pattern. In FIG. 38B, the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is a step-up notice effect pattern that executes the step-up notice effect (SU1). The step-up notice effect (SU1) is an effect of displaying the frame image G11 (FIG. 29D) as the first step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-2 (SU2)” is a step-up notice effect pattern that executes the step-up notice effect (SU2). The step-up notice effect (SU2) is an effect of displaying the frame image G12 (FIG. 29D) as the second step following the first step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-3 (SU3)” is a step-up notice effect pattern that executes the step-up notice effect (SU3). The step-up notice effect (SU3) is an effect of displaying the frame image G13 (FIG. 29D) as a third step following the first step and the second step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-4 (SU4)” is a step-up notice effect pattern that executes the step-up notice effect (SU4). The step-up notice effect (SU4) is an effect of displaying the frame image G14 (FIG. 29D) as the fourth step following the first step, the second step, and the third step in the display area of the image display device 5. is there. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-5 (SU5)” is a step-up notice effect pattern that executes the step-up notice effect (SU5). In the step-up notice effect (SU5), in the display area of the image display device 5, the frame image G15 (FIG. 29D) is used as a fifth step following the first step, the second step, the third step, and the fourth step. It is an effect to be displayed.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 38 (B), the variation pattern (variation pattern “PA2-X”, “PA3-X”, “PB3-X”, “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, “PB4-X”) ”Or“ PB5-X ”), a step-up notice effect pattern is determined. That is, when the variation pattern is “PA2-X”, the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is determined at a rate of 85%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-2 (SU2)” is determined. It is determined at a rate of 15%. When the variation pattern is “PA3-X”, the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is determined at a rate of 40%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-2 (SU2)” is 30%. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-3 (SU3)” is decided at a rate of 20%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-4 (SU4)” is decided at a rate of 10%. .

  The variation pattern “PB3-X”, the variation pattern “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, and the variation pattern “PB4-X” or “PB5-X” are also shown in FIG. Since it is as it is, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When determining the step-up notice effect pattern as shown in FIG. 38B, for example, a variation pattern (variation pattern "PA1-1" or "PB1-1", "PA2-X", "PA3-X" , “PB3-X”, “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”) are stored in the ROM 121 with a plurality of types of step-up notice effect pattern determination tables. To do.

  In each of the above step-up notice effect pattern determination tables, the step-up notice effect pattern is determined for each of the step-up notice effect patterns so that each of the step-up notice effect patterns is determined at the rate of FIG. It is only necessary to assign a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value for pattern determination (not shown). For example, in the step-up notice effect pattern determination table for the variation pattern “PA2-X”, the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is determined at a rate of 85%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1” is determined. -2 (SU2) "is determined at a rate of 15%, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the step-up notice effect pattern for each of the step-up notice effect patterns. Need only be assigned. Further, for example, in the step-up notice effect pattern determination table for the variation pattern “PA3-X”, the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is determined at a rate of 40%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “ "SYP1-2 (SU2)" is determined at a rate of 30%, step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-3 (SU3)" is determined at a rate of 20%, and step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-4 (SU4)" ”Is determined at a rate of 10%, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the step-up notice effect pattern is assigned to each of the step-up notice effect patterns. That's fine. The random value for determining the step-up notice effect pattern may be updated, for example, in the effect random number update process (step S77).

  That is, in the step-up notice effect determination process (step S530A) of the variable display start setting process (step S171) shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first responds to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Set (select) the step-up notice effect execution presence / absence determination table, numerical data indicating a random value for determining whether or not step-up notice effect execution is performed, and “no execution” or “execute” in the set step-up notice effect execution determination table The presence / absence of execution of the step-up notice effect is determined by comparing with a determination value of “Yes”. When it is determined to execute the step-up notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets (selects) a step-up notice effect pattern determination table corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and steps up. By comparing the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the notice effect pattern with the judgment value of each step up notice effect pattern in the set step up notice effect pattern determination table, one step up notice effect pattern is obtained. decide.

  After performing the step-up notice effect determining process in step S530A, the group notice effect determining process is executed (step S530B). In the group notice effect determination process, whether or not to execute the group notice effect (one aspect of the main notice effect) is determined.

  FIG. 38C is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the group notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 38C, whether or not the group notice effect is executed is determined based on the variation pattern. Specifically, when the variation pattern is “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, when the variation pattern is “PA2-X”, when the variation pattern is “PA3-X”, When it is “PB3-X”, the non-execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, execution non-execution is determined at a rate of 95%, and execution presence is determined at a rate of 5%. When the variation pattern is “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”, execution non-execution is determined at a rate of 80% and execution presence is determined at a rate of 20%.

  As shown in FIG. 38C, when determining whether or not to execute the group notice effect, for example, a variation pattern (variation pattern "PA1-1" or "PB1-1", "PA2-X", "PA3-X" ”,“ PB3-X ”,“ PA4-X ”or“ PA5-X ”,“ PB4-X ”or“ PB5-X ”), a plurality of types of group notice effect execution presence / absence determination table in the ROM 121 Remember.

  In each of the above-described group notice effect execution presence / absence determination tables, “execution not performed” and “execution present” are determined in the ratio of FIG. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the group notice effect needs to be assigned to each. For example, in the group announcement effect execution presence / absence determination table for the variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “No execution” and “Execution” are determined so that “No execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. It is only necessary to assign a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the group notice effect to each “present”. Further, for example, in the group notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the variation pattern “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, “not executed” is determined at a rate of 95%, and “executed” is set at a rate of 5%. It is sufficient that a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the group notice effect is assigned to each of “no execution” and “execution” as determined by . Note that the random value for determining whether or not to execute the group notice effect may be updated, for example, in the effect random number update process (step S77).

  That is, in the group notice effect determination process (step S530B) of the variable display start setting process (step S171) shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the group according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Set (select) a notice effect execution presence / absence determination table, and determine whether the group notice effect execution presence / absence determination table is set to “no execution” or “execution”. The presence / absence of execution of the group notice effect is determined by comparing the value and the like.

  After executing the group notice effect determination process in step S530B, the effect control CPU 120 executes a hold digest process (step S531). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) operation control for shifting the hold display in the sixth layer from the top (Z value = 5). More specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts changing the decorative symbol in conjunction with the first special symbol game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol is linked to the first special symbol game). ), The hold display or the active display after the shift based on the effect pattern (eg, the content stored in step S160B) determined in the effect determination process (step S160A) of the hold effect determination process (step S150) An effect control pattern corresponding to the display mode is set as a use pattern, and a display control command specified by display control data included in the set effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The display mode of the hold display and the active display after the shift determined in the effect determination process such as the hold Corresponding hold such as a display image (FIG. 27 (A), FIG. 27 (B), FIG. 29 (A)) to display a. The same applies to the case where the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special symbol game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol is linked to the second special symbol game).

  After executing the pending digest process in step S531, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation as a use pattern (step S532). That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 as the usage pattern. Thereby, for example, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern of the super reach β, the effect control pattern including the movable accessory control data for operating the movable accessory 17 is set as the usage pattern. . Further, when it is determined that the step-up notice effect is to be executed in the step-up notice effect determination process (step S530A), the effect control pattern corresponding to the determined step-up notice effect pattern is set as the use pattern. If it is determined in the group notice effect determination process (step S530B) that the group notice effect is to be executed, an effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect is set as a use pattern.

  After executing the process of step S532, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S532 (step S534), and starts the effect control process timer. (Step S535), the rendering device such as the image display device 5 is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data (Step S536).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (the special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 5) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command in the fluctuation time timer (step S537).

  After executing the process of step S537, the CPU 120 for effect control digests the command stored in the first start prize receiving command buffer 194A or the second start prize receiving command buffer 194B (step S538). Specifically, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special game, the effect control CPU 120 is the smallest of the commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number “1”) is deleted, and the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command to be deleted is set in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. Each command stored in the corresponding area is shifted while maintaining the winning order. In addition, when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special game, the effect control CPU 120 starts with the smallest buffer number (in the commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B). The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”) is deleted, and in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command to be deleted Each command stored in is shifted while maintaining the winning order. Also, in the process of step S538, the effect control CPU 120 stores information stored in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like according to the deletion or shift of the command. Deletions and shifts are also performed. Also, in the process of step S538, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores a command to be deleted (such as a design symbol designation command, a variation category command, etc.) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  Subsequent to the process of step S538, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” that is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S539), and ends the variable display start setting process. .

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process (step S172). FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the chance zone effect operation control process. FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice effect operation control processing and the like. FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect execution notification operation control process.

  In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the variable time timer value by 1 (step S540), and determines whether or not the variable time timer value has become 0 (step S541). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable time timer has timed out. When the variation time timer value becomes 0 (step S541; YES), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S548). ), The variable display effect process is terminated.

  When the variation time timer value is not 0 (step S541; NO), the production control CPU 120 executes operation control such as variable display of decorative symbols in the tenth layer (Z value = 9) from the top ( Start and continue) (step S542). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). An image including a decorative design corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed by transmitting the data to the VDP of the display control unit 123.

  After executing the process of step S542, a chance zone effect operation control process is executed (step S543).

  FIG. 40A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the chance zone effect operation control process (step S543). In the chance zone effect operation control process shown in FIG. 40A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the change is a chance zone change (step S9020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 has already stored information indicating that it is a chance zone effect target in association with one of the buffer numbers of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D). Whether or not the change is a chance zone change may be determined based on whether or not the change is made. If it is determined that the change is not a chance zone change (step S9020; NO), the chance zone effect operation control process is terminated.

  When it is determined that the change is a chance zone change (step S9020; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the chance zone effect in the eighth layer (Z value = 7) from the top ( Start and continue) (step S9021). Specifically, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the display control data included in the display control pattern corresponding to the chance zone display set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). Is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 to display a chance zone effect image (see FIGS. 27A, 27B, and 29C) corresponding to the chance zone effect. .

  When the chance zone effect is determined (step S9014) in the chance zone effect determination process (see FIG. 36A), it is determined that the chance zone effect is to be executed. (For example, count value “1” when it is the first hold, for example, count value “2” when it is the second hold, and hold 3) For example, a count value “3” may be set for the first time, and a count value “4” may be set for the fourth time, for example. The chance zone continuation counter may be provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193.

  As described above, when the chance zone continuation counter is used, in the process of step S9020, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation is a chance zone fluctuation based on the value of the chance zone continuation counter. May be.

  After performing the chance zone effect operation control process in step S543, a step-up notice effect operation control process is executed (step S544).

  FIG. 40B is a flowchart illustrating an example of the step-up notice effect operation control process (step S544). In the step-up notice effect operation control process shown in FIG. 40 (B), the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is a step-up notice effect period (period in which the step-up notice effect is executed) (step). S9030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern is already set as the use pattern, and if it is already set as the use pattern, the set content (execution) It may be determined whether or not it is a step-up notice effect period based on the timing and the value of the effect control process timer. If it is determined that it is not the step-up notice effect period (step S9030; NO), the step-up notice effect operation control process is terminated.

  When it is determined that it is the step-up notice effect period (step S9030; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) the operation control of the step-up notice effect in the ninth layer (Z value = 8) from the top. , Continue) (step S9031). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). Step-up notice effect images corresponding to the step-up notice effects (SU1 to SU5) by transmitting a control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 (FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 29 (D)) is displayed.

  After executing the process of step S9031, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the SU5 execution flag indicating that the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed is on (step S9032). The SU5 execution flag may be provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. If the SU5 execution flag is on (step S9032; YES), the step-up notice effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the SU5 execution flag is not on (step S9032; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed (step S9033). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern is set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171), or when it is set as the use pattern. May determine whether or not the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed based on the set contents (execution timing of SU5, etc.) and the value of the effect control process timer. If the step-up notice effect (SU5) has not been executed (step S9033; NO), the step-up notice effect operation control process is terminated. When the step-up notice effect (SU5) is executed (step S9033; YES), the SU5 execution flag is set to the on state (step S9034), and the step-up notice effect operation control process is terminated.

  After performing the step-up notice effect operation control process in step S544, the group notice effect action control process is executed (step S545).

  FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing an example of the group notice effect operation control process (step S545). In the group notice effect operation control process shown in FIG. 41A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is a group notice effect period (period in which the group notice effect is executed) (step S9040). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect is set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171), and sets it when the use pattern is set. It may be determined whether or not it is the group notice effect period based on the contents (execution timing of the group notice effect, etc.) and the value of the effect control process timer. If it is determined that it is not the group notice effect period (step S9040; NO), the group notice effect operation control process is terminated.

  When it is determined that it is the group notice effect period (step S9040; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the group notice effect in the seventh layer (Z value = 6) from the top (start, continue). (Step S9041). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). Is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 to display a group notice effect image corresponding to the group notice effect (see FIGS. 27A, 27B, and 29B). .

  After executing the process of step S9041, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the group notice effect execution flag indicating that the group notice effect has been executed is on (step S9042). The group notice effect execution flag may be provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. If the group notice effect execution flag is on (step S9042; YES), the group notice effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the group notice effect execution flag is not in the on state (step S9042; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the group notice effect execution flag to the on state (step S9043), and ends the group notice effect operation control process.

  After performing the group notice effect operation control process of step S545, the accessory operation control process is executed (step S546).

  FIG. 41B is a flowchart illustrating an example of the accessory operation control process (step S546). In the accessory operation control process shown in FIG. 41B, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is an accessory operation period (a period during which the movable accessory 17 is operated) (step S9050). For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (the variation pattern of the super reach β) accompanying the operation of the movable accessory 17 as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171). If it is set as a usage pattern, whether or not it is a group notice production period based on the set contents (such as the operation timing of the movable accessory 17) and the value of the production control process timer. You may judge. When it is determined that it is not the accessory operation period (step S9050; NO), the accessory operation control process is terminated.

  When it is determined that it is the accessory operation period (step S9050; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes operation control of the movable accessory 17 (step S9051). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control includes the movable combination included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (the variation pattern of the super reach β) set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). The movable accessory 17 is operated by transmitting a control command specified by the object control data to the accessory control board 16.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S9051, the CPU 120 for effect control executes (starts and continues) the operation control of the effect effect effect in the fifth layer from the top (Z value = 4) (step S9052). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control pattern (the effect effect effect corresponding to the change pattern (the change pattern of the super reach β) set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). The effect effect effect image corresponding to the effect effect effect is transmitted by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data to the VDP of the display control unit 123 included in the display control data to be executed). (See FIGS. 27A, 27B, and 28C).

  After executing the process of step S9052, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the accessory effect execution flag indicating that the operation control of the accessory is performed is on (step S9053). The accessory effect execution flag may be provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. If the accessory effect execution flag is on (step S9053; YES), the accessory operation control process is terminated.

  When the accessory effect execution flag is not in the on state (step S9053; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the accessory effect execution flag to the on state (step S9054), and ends the accessory operation control process.

  After performing the accessory operation control process of step S546, an effect execution notification operation control process is executed (step S547).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547). In the effect execution notification operation control process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the notification period of the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) (step S9060). For example, the effect control CPU 120 is set if the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) has already been set as the use pattern, or if it has already been set as the use pattern. Whether or not it is the notification period of the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) may be determined based on the contents (notification timing and the like) and the value of the effect control process timer.

  When it is determined that it is not the notification period of the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) (step S9060; NO), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed. It is determined whether or not is in an on state (step S9061). When the SU5 execution flag is in the on state (step S9061; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the SU5 execution flag to the off state (step S9062).

  When it is determined that it is the notification period of the execution notification of SU5 (step S9060; YES), or after the processing of step S9062 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines the layer according to the notification number and the notification start order (Z value = 1 to 3) execute (start, continue) the operation control of the execution notification of SU5 (step S9063). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 as a use pattern, and displays a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. An effect execution notification image (FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B, FIG. 28D) corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 by transmitting to the VDP of the control unit 123, etc. 28E and 28F) are displayed.

  When the SU5 execution flag is not in the ON state (step S9061; NO), or after executing the process of step S9063, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a notification period of execution notification of the group notice effect ( Step S9064). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect has already been set as the use pattern, and if the use pattern has already been set, the set content ( It may be determined whether or not it is a notification period of execution notification of the group notice effect based on the notification timing and the value of the effect control process timer.

  When it is determined that it is not the notification period of the execution notification of the group notice effect (step S9064; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group notice effect execution flag indicating that the group notice effect has been executed is on. Is determined (step S9065). When the group notice effect execution flag is in the on state (step S9065; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the group notice effect execution flag to the off state (step S9066).

  When it is determined that it is the notification period of execution notification of the group notice effect (step S9064; YES), or after executing the processing of step S9066, the effect control CPU 120 determines the layer (Z according to the notification number and notification start order). The control of the group notice effect execution notification is executed (started and continued) with a value = 1 to 3) (step S9067). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control sets an effect control pattern corresponding to execution notification of the group notice effect as a use pattern, and a display control command specified by display control data included in the set effect control pattern. Is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example, the effect execution notification image corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect (FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B, FIG. 28 (D), FIG. 28 (E), and FIG. 28 (F)) are displayed.

  When the group notice effect execution flag is not in the ON state (step S9065; NO), or after executing the process of step S9067, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the notification period of the execution notification of the accessory effect. (Step S9068). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the effect effect has already been set as the use pattern, and if the use pattern has already been set, the set content ( It may be determined whether or not it is the notification period of the execution notification of the accessory effect based on the notification timing and the value of the effect control process timer.

  If it is determined that it is not the notification period of the execution notification of the accessory effect (step S9068; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the accessory effect execution flag is in the on state (step S9069). If the accessory effect execution flag is not on (step S9069; NO), the effect execution notification operation control process is terminated. When the accessory effect execution flag is on (step S9069; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the accessory effect execution flag to the off state (step S9070).

  When it is determined that it is the notification period of the execution notification of the accessory effect (step S9068; YES), or after executing the processing of step S9070, the CPU 120 for effect control responds to the layer (Z With the value = 1 to 3), the operation control of the execution notification of the accessory effect is executed (started and continued) (step S9071). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the effect effect as the use pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. Is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example, the effect execution notification image corresponding to the execution notification of the accessory effect (FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B, FIG. 28 (D), FIG. 28 (E), and FIG. 28 (F)) are displayed. Then, the effect execution notification operation control process ends.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special figure waiting process (step S173). In the special symbol waiting process shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a symbol confirmation designation command has been received (step S720). When it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command has not been received (step S720; NO), the special symbol waiting process is terminated.

  When it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received (step S720; YES), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the confirmed decorative symbol (step S722). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot symbol (step S723). When the confirmed decorative symbol is not a big hit symbol (step S723: NO), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0” which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S726). The waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  When the confirmed decorative symbol is a big hit symbol (step S723: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command has been received (step S730). When it is determined that the hit start designation command has not been received (step S730; NO), the special hit waiting process is terminated.

  When it is determined that the winning start designation command is received (step S730; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect (step S733), and sets the value of the effect process flag to the value corresponding to the jackpot start process. Is updated to "4" (step S734), and the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. 44A to 44E show the display operations arranged in time series. In FIG. 44A and the like, the arrow “↓” shown in the display area of the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing.

  FIG. 44A shows a final stop symbol (left symbol “4”, middle symbol “1”, right symbol “6”) in a variable display corresponding to the hold indicator M0 (not shown) immediately before the hold indicator M1. Indicates a scene that is stopped. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (A), a decorative design image (Z value = 9) including a final stop design and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M1, M2, M3). And a display image (Z value = 5) including hold.

  In the decorative design image, an effect control pattern corresponding to a variation pattern or the like is set as a use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and the effect control pattern is set as an effect control pattern in the variable display effect process (see FIG. 39). A display control command designated by the included display control data is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123. The display image such as the hold is set as the use pattern with the effect control pattern corresponding to the display mode of the hold display or the active display in the winning effect determining process (see FIG. 33) or the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). The display control command specified by the display control data included in the set production control pattern is transmitted to the display control unit 123 and displayed.

  Note that the hold display M3 is additionally displayed based on the first start winning that occurred during variable display corresponding to the hold display M0 (not shown) (step S162 of the effect determination process at the time of winning in FIG. 33). . In addition, when the hold display M3 is additionally displayed, execution of the chance zone effect targeting the hold display M3 is determined in the chance zone effect determination process (step S161A) (step in FIG. 36A). S9014).

  FIG. 44B shows a scene where variable display corresponding to the hold display M1 is performed. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (B), an image of a decorative design including a decorative design that is changing (Z value = 9), and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) And an active display image G7 (active display M1) including a hold display image (Z value = 5) and a chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including a character image G9 and a pictogram image G10 are displayed. Yes.

  In the chance zone effect image, an effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect is set as a use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and in the chance zone effect operation control process (see FIG. 40A). The display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123.

  It is assumed that the variation pattern corresponding to the hold display M1 is a variation pattern accompanying the operation of the movable accessory 17 (a variation pattern of the super reach β). In addition, when the hold display M1 is consumed, it is assumed that execution of the step-up notice effect (SU4) and execution of the group notice effect are determined in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37).

  FIG. 44C shows a scene following FIG. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44C, an image of a decorative design (Z value = 9) including a decorative design that is changing, and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) Hold display image (Z value = 5) including the image display and active display image G7 (active display M1), chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10, and the frame image G14 A step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) is displayed. In FIG. 44C, characters and the like are displayed as SU4 in the frame image G14, but are not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 44D to 44E.

  In the step-up notice effect image, the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern is set as a use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and the step-up notice effect operation control process (FIG. 40B). The display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is transmitted to the display control unit 123 and the like.

  FIG. 44D illustrates a scene following FIG. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (D), an image of a decorative design (Z value = 9) including a decorative design that is changing, and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) Hold display image (Z value = 5) including the image display and active display image G7 (active display M1), chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10, and the frame image G14 Including a step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including the character image G8, a group notice effect image (Z value = 6) including the character image G8, and an effect execution including the pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect. A notification image (Z value = 3) is displayed.

  In the group notice effect image, an effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect is set as a use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and in the group notice effect operation control process (see FIG. 41A). The display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123. In the effect execution notification image corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect, the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect is set as the use pattern in the effect execution notification operation control (see FIG. 42). A display control command designated by the display control data included in the control pattern is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123.

  FIG. 44E illustrates a scene following FIG. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (E), an image of a decorative pattern (Z value = 9) including a decorative pattern that is changing, and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) Hold display image (Z value = 5) including the image display and active display image G7 (active display M1), chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10, and the frame image G14 Including a step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including the character image G8, a group notice effect image (Z value = 6) including the character image G8, and an effect execution including the pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect. The effect execution notification image (Z) including the notification image (Z value = 3), the effect effect effect image (Z value = 4) including the effect image G4, and the pictogram image G3-2 corresponding to the execution notification of the accessory effect. Value = 2) and It is displayed. In FIG. 44 (E), the moved (lowered) movable accessory 17 is not shown. The same applies to FIG.

  In the effect effect effect image, the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (the variation pattern of the super reach β) is set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and the accessory operation control process (see FIG. 41 (B)), the display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is transmitted to the display control unit 123, and the like. In the effect execution notification image corresponding to the execution notification of the effect effect, the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the effect effect is set as the use pattern in the effect execution notification operation control (see FIG. 42). A display control command designated by the display control data included in the control pattern is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123.

  As shown in FIG. 44, an image with a small Z value is displayed on the front layer, and an image with a large Z value is displayed on the back layer.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. 45A to 44F show display operations arranged in time series. In FIG. 45A and the like, the arrow “↓” shown in the display area of the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing.

  FIG. 45A shows a final stop symbol (left symbol “2”, middle symbol “8”, right symbol “8”) in a variable display corresponding to the hold indicator M20 (not shown) immediately before the hold indicator M21. Indicates a scene that is stopped. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45A includes a decorative design image (Z value = 9) including the final stop design, and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M21, M22). A hold display image (Z value = 5) is displayed.

  FIG. 45B shows a scene in which variable display corresponding to the hold display M21 is performed. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45B, an image of a decorative design (Z value = 9) including a decorative design that is changing, a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22), and an active A hold display image (Z value = 5) including the display image G7 (active display M21) is displayed.

  It is assumed that the variation pattern corresponding to the hold display M21 is a variation pattern accompanying the operation of the movable accessory 17 (a variation pattern of the super reach β). In addition, when the hold display M21 is consumed, it is assumed that execution of the step-up notice effect (SU5) and execution of the group notice effect are determined in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37).

  FIG. 45C shows a scene following FIG. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45C, an image of a decorative design including a changing decorative design (Z value = 9), a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22), and an active Display image such as hold (Z value = 5) including display image G7 (active display M21), step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including frame image G15, and pictogram image corresponding to execution notification of SU5 An effect execution notification image (Z value = 3) including G3-1 is displayed. In FIG. 45C, characters and the like are displayed as SU5 in the frame image G15, but are not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 45D to 45F. In FIG. 45 (C), a decorative pattern that is changing is visible in a region other than the frame image G15, but is not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 45D to 45F.

  The effect execution notification image corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 is included in the effect control pattern set while the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 is set as the use pattern in the effect execution notification operation control (see FIG. 42). The display control command designated by the display control data to be displayed is transmitted to the display control unit 123 or the like.

  FIG. 45D illustrates a scene following FIG. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (D), an image of a decorative design (Z value = 9) including a decorative design that is changing, a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22), and an active Display image such as hold (Z value = 5) including display image G7 (active display M21), step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including frame image G15, and pictogram image corresponding to execution notification of SU5 An effect execution notification image (Z value = 3) including G3-1, a group notice effect image (Z value = 6) including a character image G8, and a pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to the execution notification of the group notification effect are included. An effect execution notification image (Z value = 2) is displayed.

  FIG. 45E illustrates a scene following FIG. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (E), an image of a decorative design (Z value = 9) including a decorative design that is changing, a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22), and an active Display image such as hold (Z value = 5) including display image G7 (active display M21), step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including frame image G15, and pictogram image corresponding to execution notification of SU5 An effect execution notification image (Z value = 3) including G3-1, a group notice effect image (Z value = 6) including a character image G8, and a pictogram image G3-2 corresponding to the execution notification of the group notification effect are included. An effect execution notification image (Z value = 2), an effect effect effect image (Z value = 4) including an effect image G4, and an effect execution notification image including a pictogram image G3-3 corresponding to the execution notification of an effect effect (Z value = 1 Bets are displayed.

  FIG. 45F shows a scene where a magnetic abnormality has occurred in the state of FIG. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (F), an error notification image (Z value = 0) including the pictogram image G1 and the character image G2 is displayed in addition to each screen of FIG. 45 (E). Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 44, an image with a small Z value is displayed on the front layer, and an image with a large Z value is displayed on the back layer.

  In addition, effects other than the effects described above can be executed. For example, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect related to the opening of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of a predetermined effect process for executing a predetermined effect related to the opening of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 46 is executed, for example, before the winning effect determining process of the effect control process (see FIG. 32). In FIG. 46, a predetermined effect related to the opening of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is simply referred to as a predetermined effect.

  In the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a predetermined effect executing flag indicating that the predetermined effect is being executed is set (step S731). When the predetermined effect execution flag is set in step S731 (that is, when the predetermined effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 120 determines the predetermined effect timer for measuring the effect period of the predetermined effect. The value of -1 is decremented by 1 (step S734), and it is determined whether or not the value of the predetermined effect timer has become 0 (step S735A). When the value of the predetermined effect timer is not 0 (step S735A; NO), the operation control of the predetermined effect (see FIG. 48A described later) is executed (continued) (step S735B), and the predetermined effect process is performed. Exit. When the value of the predetermined effect timer becomes 0 (step S735A; YES), the predetermined effect is ended (step S736), the predetermined effect execution flag is reset (step S737), and the predetermined effect process is ended.

  If the predetermined effect execution flag is not set in step S731 (step S731; NO), the effect control CPU 120 starts the normal symbol variation start designation command (ordinary symbol variation start designation (hit) command or normal symbol variation start). Whether the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag (ordinary symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag or normal symbol variation start designation (lack) command reception flag) indicating that the designation (losing command) has been received is set. It is determined whether or not (step S751). If the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is not set (step S751; NO), the predetermined effect process is terminated.

  When the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set (step S751; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the high base state based on the time-short flag. (Step S752). If the current gaming state is the high base state (step S752; YES), the predetermined effect process is terminated.

  If the current gaming state is not the high base state (step S752; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit gaming state (step S753). Whether or not the game state is a big hit gaming state may be determined, for example, based on the value of the effect process flag. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the game state is a big hit game state when the value of the effect process flag is 4 or more. If it is a big hit gaming state (step S753; YES), the predetermined effect process is terminated.

  When it is not the big hit gaming state (step S753; NO), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the decorative symbol is changing (step S755). Whether or not the decorative design is changing may be determined, for example, based on the value of the effect process flag. If the decorative design is not changing (step S755; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one minute or more has elapsed since the change of the decorative design was completed (step S757). For example, a timer may be prepared for measuring the time after the decoration symbol variation ends, and it may be determined whether or not one minute or more has elapsed based on the measured value of the timer. If one minute or more has elapsed (step S757; YES), the predetermined effect process is terminated. If one minute or more has not elapsed (step S757; NO), the process proceeds to step S759.

  Note that the end of the process when more than one minute has passed since the change of the decorative symbol has taken into consideration that the player continues playing the game for a while after the change of the decorative symbol ends. Because. In addition, the above 1 minute is slightly longer than the time (12 seconds × 4) based on the normal symbol variation time (12 seconds) in the low base state and the upper limit value 4 of the number of gate passing memories (ordinary symbol holding number). This is because it is considered better to execute the process of step S759 until the time (60 seconds) elapses.

  When the decorative symbol is changing (step S755; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the predetermined effect and the type (step S759).

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of whether or not to execute a predetermined effect. In the process of step S759, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, whether or not to execute the predetermined effect at a ratio as shown in FIG. That is, the determination value to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the presence / absence of execution of a predetermined effect is assigned to the determination table for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect so as to have a ratio as shown in FIG.

  In the process of step S759, when the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 has a predetermined effect execution enabled (notification “×”) and a predetermined effect execution enabled (notification “ ○ ”), for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect so that the ratio of each of the execution of the predetermined effect (notification“ × ”→“ ◯ ”) and no execution of the predetermined effect becomes the ratio of“ per normal symbol ”in FIG. The determination values to be compared with the random number (not shown) are predetermined performance execution present (notification “×”), predetermined performance execution present (notification “◯”), predetermined performance execution present (notification “×” → “◯”), By selecting a table assigned to each of the predetermined performance execution absence and comparing a determination value with a random number (not shown) for determining the presence or absence of the predetermined performance execution, the predetermined performance execution (notification “×”), Predetermined production execution available (notification “◯”) Knowledge “×” → “◯”), or not performing the predetermined effect. In addition, when the normal symbol variation start designation (losing) command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs predetermined effect execution present (notification “×”), predetermined effect execution present (notification “◯”), Random number for determining whether or not to perform a predetermined effect (non-notification “×” → “◯”), and determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect, such that the ratio of each of the predetermined effects not executed becomes the ratio of “ordinary symbol loss” in FIG. The determination values to be compared with those shown in the figure are execution of predetermined effects (notification “×”), execution of predetermined effects (notification “◯”), execution of predetermined effects (notification “×” → “◯”), no execution of predetermined effects Is selected, and a random number (not shown) for determining the presence / absence of execution of a predetermined effect is compared with a determination value, whereby a predetermined effect is executed (notification “×”), and a predetermined effect is executed. (Notification “◯”), Predetermined production performed (Notification “×” → “〇”), location It may be determined either demonstration execution no. It should be noted that the execution of the predetermined effect (notification “x”) is to execute the predetermined effect that displays “x”. The execution of the predetermined effect (notification “◯”) is to execute the predetermined effect that displays “◯”. The execution of the predetermined effect (notification “×” → “◯”) is to execute the predetermined effect that displays “◯” after the display of “×”. The execution of the predetermined effect is not executing the predetermined effect.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 resets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag when executing the process of step S759. Also, the effect control CPU 120 resets the set normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag even when the processing of step S759 is not executed due to the determination of “YES” in steps S752, S753, and S755.

  Subsequent to the process of step S759, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the predetermined effect by the process of step S759 (step S764). If it is not determined to execute the predetermined effect (step S764; NO), the predetermined effect process is terminated.

  When it is determined to execute the predetermined effect (step S764; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the determined pattern of the predetermined effect in the predetermined effect timer. (Step S778), a predetermined effect is started (Step S779). Note that the processes in steps S778 and S779 are processes that start a predetermined effect timer and control an effect device such as the image display device 5 in accordance with the contents of the process data (the same processing as steps S535 and S536 in FIG. 37). is there. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined effect execution flag (step S780), and ends the predetermined effect process.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the predetermined performance operation control process (see FIG. 46) and the like. Although the Z value of the background (background image) has been described as “10”, it is assumed that the Z value of the background is “11” in FIG.

  FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing an example of the predetermined effect operation control process (step S735B). In the predetermined effect operation control process shown in FIG. 48A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the decorative symbol is being variably displayed (step S9080). The effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed based on the value of the effect process flag and the received command. For example, when the value of the effect process flag is 1 or 2, or when the value of the effect process flag is 3 and before the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 is displaying the decorative symbol in a variable display. If the effect process flag value is 0, or if the effect process flag value is 3 and after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the ornament symbol is stopped (the ornament symbol is displayed). It may be determined that the variable display is not in progress.

  If it is determined that the decorative symbol is variably displayed (step S9080; YES), the effect control CPU 120 has a layer higher than the decorative symbol layer (Z value = 9) (for example, Z value = 8). The operation control of the predetermined effect is executed (start, continue) at (Step S9081). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern set as the use pattern in the predetermined effect process (see FIG. 46). A predetermined effect image (Z value = 8) corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by, for example, transmitting to the VDP or the like of the control unit 123. Then, the predetermined effect operation control process ends.

  When it is determined that the decorative design is not variable (step S9080; NO), the effect control CPU 120 uses a layer (for example, Z value = 10) lower than the decorative design layer (Z value = 9). The operation control of the predetermined effect is executed (started and continued) (step S9082). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern set as the use pattern in the predetermined effect process (see FIG. 46). A predetermined effect image (Z value = 10) corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by transmitting it to the VDP or the like of the control unit 123. Then, the predetermined effect operation control process ends.

  FIG. 48B shows a predetermined effect image (an example). The predetermined effect image shown in FIG. 48 (A) includes a roulette table image G16 for displaying a predetermined effect symbol (for example, a result such as “◯”, “x” after variable display is displayed after variable display). It includes an effect design image G17. The display time of the predetermined effect image (the execution time of the predetermined effect) is, for example, a time corresponding to the effect time by the selected predetermined effect pattern. A black arrow “↓” in the image G17 indicates that the predetermined effect design is changing. In the predetermined effect, when the image G17 indicating the change “◯” is displayed after the image G17 indicating the change is displayed (the result “X” is displayed after the image G17 indicating the change is displayed). Similarly, when the image G17 is displayed once and finally the image G17 showing the result “◯” is displayed), the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is controlled to the open state. While the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the open state, the display is switched from the result “◯” to, for example, “open”. Note that the result “◯” may continue to be displayed while the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the open state. On the other hand, when the image G17 indicating the result “x” is displayed after the image G17 indicating the change is displayed, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is not controlled to the open state.

  48C and 48D are diagrams illustrating an example of a display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. 48C and 48D show the display operations arranged in time series. In FIG. 48C, an arrow (white arrow) “↓” shown in the display area of the image display device 5 represents that the decorative design is changing. Also, the black arrow “↓” in the image G17 represents that the predetermined effect design is changing.

  FIG. 48C shows a scene in which a predetermined effect is being performed during variable display of decorative symbols. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 48C includes an image of a decorative design (Z value = 9) including a decorative design being variably displayed, and an active display image G7 (active display M31). A hold display image (Z value = 5) and a predetermined effect image (Z value = 8) including an image G16 of a roulette table and an image G17 of a predetermined effect symbol are displayed.

  FIG. 48D shows a scene in which a predetermined effect is being performed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 48D, an image of a decorative design (Z value = 9) including a decorative design that is being stopped, an image G16 of a roulette stand, and an image G17 of a predetermined effect design. And a predetermined effect image (Z value = 10) are displayed.

  In the above description, when the predetermined effect is executed during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the predetermined effect is executed on the back side of the decorative symbol during the stop display, but the stop display is performed even during the stop display of the decorative symbol. After elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 1 second elapses), a predetermined effect may be executed on the front face of the decorative symbol during the stop display as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 48 (E) shows a scene in which a predetermined effect is performed during decorative symbol stop display (after a predetermined time has elapsed since stop display). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 48E, an image of a decorative design (Z value = 9) including a decorative design being stopped and displayed, an image G16 of a roulette stand, and an image G17 of a predetermined effect design. And a predetermined effect image (Z value = 8).

  As described above, an error notification image (FIG. 28A), an effect execution notification image (FIG. 28B), an accessory effect effect image (FIG. 28C), a hold display image (FIG. 29A), Each of the group notice effect image (FIG. 29B), the chance zone effect image (FIG. 29C), the step-up notice effect image (FIG. 29D), the predetermined effect image (FIG. 48B), etc. Although the Z value of the image has been described, the Z values of images other than those described above will be described below.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of Z values and the like of other images. FIG. 49 (A) shows a cumulative prize ball number notification image (one example) for notifying the cumulative prize ball number. The cumulative prize ball number notification image shown in FIG. 49A includes a pictogram image G18 for notifying that a predetermined cumulative prize ball number (for example, 3000, 5000, 10000, etc.) has been reached. Note that the pictogram image G18 in FIG. 49A notifies that 5000 images have been reached. The display time of the cumulative prize ball number notification image (the notification time of the cumulative prize ball number) may be, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or until the end of the round. The display time of the cumulative prize ball number notification image may be varied according to the cumulative prize ball number to be notified.

  FIG. 49B shows an award ball number notification image (one example) for notifying the number of winning balls for each jackpot. The prize ball number notification image shown in FIG. 49B includes a pictogram image G19 for notifying that a predetermined cumulative number of prize balls (for example, 1000, 2000, etc.) has been reached. In addition, the pictogram image G19 of FIG. 49 (B) notifies that it reached 2000 pieces. The display time of the winning ball number notification image (the notification time of the cumulative number of winning balls) may be, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or until the end of the round. Depending on the number of prize balls to be notified, the display time of the prize ball number notification image may be varied.

  FIG. 49 (C) shows an opening effect image (one example) displayed when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state. The opening effect image shown in FIG. 49 (C) includes an image G20 that informs what number the current round is and a frame image G21 that executes the opening effect. In FIG. 49C, characters and the like are displayed in the frame image G21 as an effect during opening, but are not shown.

  FIG. 49D shows Z values set for the images shown in FIGS. 28A and 49A to 49C. According to the setting of the Z value shown in FIG. 49 (D), the cumulative prize ball number notification image is displayed in front of the opening effect image, and the prize ball number notification image is displayed in front of the cumulative prize ball number notification image. An error notification image (see FIG. 28A) is displayed in front of the winning ball number notification image. Note that the Z value of each image is not limited to the example of FIG. For example, instead of FIG. 49D, a Z value may be set for each image as shown in FIG. 49E, or a Z value may be set for each image as shown in FIG. Alternatively, a Z value may be set for each image as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 50 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing layers of various images. When a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49D, an error notification image having a Z value “0” is displayed on the foremost layer as shown in FIG. The prize ball number notification image having the Z value “1” is displayed on one layer behind the error notification image, and the cumulative prize ball number notification image having the Z value “2” is one of the prize ball number notification images. An opening effect image having a Z value “3” displayed on the back layer is displayed on one back layer of the cumulative prize ball number notification image. In addition, when the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (D), when the error notification, the prize ball number notification, the cumulative prize ball number notification, and the execution period of the opening effect overlap, In the display area of the display device 5, for example, each image is displayed as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 51 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing layers of various images. When the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (G), as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the cumulative award ball number notification image having the Z value “0” is the frontmost image. The prize ball number notification image having the Z value “1” displayed on the layer is displayed on one layer behind the cumulative prize ball number notification image, and the error notification image having the Z value “2” is the prize ball number notification image. The open effect image having the Z value “3” is displayed on one back layer of the error notification image. In addition, when the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (G), when the cumulative prize ball number notification, the number of prize balls notification, the error notification, and the performance period of the opening effect overlap, In the display area of the display device 5, for example, each image is displayed as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 52A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the mid-round processing (step S175). In the description of FIG. 52A, it is assumed that a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. Note that the flowchart in FIG. 52B will be described later.

  In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 52 (A), the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a notification command after opening the special winning opening is received (step S571).

  When it is determined that the notification command after the big prize opening is not received (step S571; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the effect during the opening in the fourth layer (Z value = 3) from the top. (Start, continue) (step S572). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control includes display control included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during opening set as the use pattern in the big hit start process (see FIG. 32) or the post-round process (see FIG. 32). An opening effect image (see FIG. 49C) corresponding to the opening effect is displayed by transmitting a display control command designated by the data to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123.

  After executing the process of step S572, the effect control CPU 120 executes a prize ball number notification operation control process (step S573). Specifically, the production control CPU 120 adds the number of prize balls every time it receives a big prize opening notification command in the current big hit gaming state, and the number of prize balls after the addition is a predetermined number (for example, 1000, When the number reaches 2000, etc., operation control of the award ball number notification is executed (started and continued) for the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in the second highest layer (Z value = 1). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the number of winning balls as a use pattern, and displays the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. A prize ball number notification image (see FIG. 49 (B)) corresponding to the prize ball number notification is displayed by, for example, transmitting to the VDP of the control unit 123.

  After executing the process of step S573, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cumulative prize ball number notification operation control process (step S574). Specifically, the production control CPU 120 receives the winning prize winning notification command in the consecutive jackpot gaming state (the jackpot gaming state that is continuously shifted without being in the normal state) every time a cumulative winning ball number is received. When the cumulative number of award balls after the addition reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000, 5000, 10000, etc.), the third layer (Z value) from the top for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) = 2) Execute (start, continue) operation control of cumulative prize ball number notification. Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the cumulative prize ball number notification as a use pattern, and displays a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. The cumulative prize ball number notification image (see FIG. 49A) corresponding to the cumulative prize ball number notification is displayed by transmitting it to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Then, the process during the round ends. Whether or not the normal state is reached after the end of the big hit gaming state (whether or not the transition to the low probability low base state) is received, the gaming state designation command (designation to transition to the low probability low base state) is received It may be determined by determining whether or not the number of times of ST (the number of times of probability variation) and the number of time reductions are managed (counted) on the side of the production control board 12 as in the case of the main board 11 side.

  When it is determined that the notification command after opening the big prize opening is received (step S571; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect during closing (step S576), and the value of the effect process flag corresponds to the post-round processing. The value is updated to “6” (step S577), and the round is ended.

  In the above description, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type. However, the condition for determining the jackpot type is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of or inside the big prize opening, and the type of jackpot is determined based on the game ball entering (passing) into the specific area. Good. Specifically, for example, in the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation jackpot may be determined based on a game ball entering a specific area. In addition, when the probability variation big hit is confirmed based on the game ball entering the specific area, the confirmation of the probability variation big hit may be notified (probability variation confirmation notification).

  FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of Z values and the like of other images. FIG. 53A shows a probability change confirmation notification image (one example) for notifying the confirmation of probability variation big hit. The probability change confirmation notification image shown in FIG. 53 (A) includes a character image G22 that notifies the word “probability change!”.

  FIG. 53 (B) shows the Z values set in the probability change confirmation notification images shown in FIGS. 28 (A), 49 (A) to 49 (C), and 53 (A). According to the setting of the Z value shown in FIG. 53 (B), the cumulative prize ball number notification image is displayed in front of the opening effect image, and the prize ball number notification image is displayed in front of the cumulative prize ball number notification image. The probability change confirmation notification image is displayed in front of the winning ball number notification image, and the error notification image is displayed in front of the probability change confirmation notification image. Note that the Z value of each image is not limited to the example in FIG. For example, instead of FIG. 53 (B), a Z value may be set for each image as shown in any of FIGS. 53 (C) to 53 (G).

  FIG. 54 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing layers of various images. When a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 53B, an error notification image having a Z value “0” is displayed on the foremost layer as shown in FIG. 54A. The probability change confirmation notification image having the Z value “1” is displayed on one layer behind the error notification image, and the winning ball number notification image having the Z value “2” is one layer behind the probability change determination notification image. The cumulative prize ball number notification image having the Z value “3” is displayed on one layer behind the prize ball number notification image, and the opening effect image having the Z value “4” is notified of the cumulative prize ball number. Displayed on the layer behind one of the images. Also, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), when the Z value is set for each image, the execution period of the error notification, the probability change confirmation notification image, the prize ball number notification, the cumulative prize ball number notification, and the opening effect is set. When the images overlap, each image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 52 (B) is a flowchart showing an example of a process during round (step S175) in a mode in which a probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed when a probability variation big hit is confirmed based on a game ball entering a specific area. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 52B, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52 (B), in the aspect in which the probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed when the probability variation big hit is confirmed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cumulative prize ball number notification operation control processing (step S574). After that, the probability change confirmation notification operation control process is executed (step S575). That is, the CPU 120 for effect control receives a certain change confirmation notification command certain change confirmation notification command (not shown) transmitted from the main board 11 when the game medium passes through the specific area, for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). A predetermined layer (for example, when a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the second layer from the top (Z value = 1), and for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (C). As described above, when the Z value is set for each image, the motion control of the probability change confirmation notification is executed (started and continued) in the uppermost layer (Z value = 0). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the probability change confirmation notification as a use pattern, and performs display control of a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. The probability change confirmation notification image (see FIG. 53A) corresponding to the probability change confirmation notification is displayed by transmitting the data to the VDP of the unit 123 or the like.

  In the above description, there is one kind of effect effect effect image displayed corresponding to the operation of the movable accessory 17, but an effect effect effect image displayed corresponding to the operation of the movable accessory 17. May be two or more. Further, when there are two types of the effect effect effect images displayed corresponding to the operation of the movable accessory 17, the same Z value may be set for the two types of effect effect effect images. Different Z values may be set. Further, when there are three or more types of effect effect effect images displayed corresponding to the operation of the movable accessory 17, the same Z value may be set for all the effect effect effect images, A Z value different from that of other effect effect effect images may be set for one type of effect effect effect image.

  Further, in the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes one movable body (movable accessory 17), but may include two or more movable bodies. In an aspect including two or more movable bodies, each accessory effect effect image displayed corresponding to the operation of each movable body may be prepared. Further, the same Z value may be set for each of the above-mentioned accessory effect effect images, or different Z values may be set. For example, when there are two types of effect effect effect images (for example, an effect effect effect image a corresponding to the operation of the movable body A and an effect effect effect image b corresponding to the operation of the movable body B), the 2 The same Z value may be set for the types of effect effect effects images a and b, or different Z values may be set for the two types of effect effect effects images a and b. Also, three types of effect effects effect images (for example, an effect effect effect image c corresponding to the operation of the movable body C, an effect effect effect image d corresponding to the operation of the movable body D, and an operation of the movable body E are supported. If there is an effect effect image e) to be performed, the same Z value may be set for all three types, different Z values may be set for all three types, or the same for both types A Z value (for example, 4) may be set, and a different Z value (for example, 6) may be set for one other type. The same applies when there are four or more types of effect effect effect images. In addition, when there are a plurality of accessory effect effect images set with the same Z value in an aspect including two or more movable bodies, the display areas of the respective accessory effect effect images set with the same Z value overlap. It may not be necessary. In other words, the same Z value may be set for the effect effect effect image whose display areas do not overlap.

  In the above description, an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 is set in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) in the variable display effect processing (step S172) (step S9063), but variable. In the display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 may be set. Specifically, when it is determined in step S530A to execute step-up notice effect (SU5) in the step-up notice effect determination process, the effect control pattern corresponding to SU5 is set in the process of setting the effect control pattern in step S532. May be set as a usage pattern, and an effect control pattern corresponding to execution notification of SU5 may be set.

  In the above description, the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect is set in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) in the variable display effect process (step S172) (S9067). In the variable display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to execution notification of the group notice effect may be set. Specifically, when it is determined to execute the group notice effect in the group notice effect determining process in step S530B, the effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect is used in the process of setting the effect control pattern in step S532. And an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect may be set.

  In the above description, the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the accessory effect is set in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) in the variable display effect process (step S172) (S9071). In the variable display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the accessory effect may be set. Specifically, in the case of the super reach β variation pattern, in the process of setting the effect control pattern in step S532, the effect control pattern corresponding to the super reach β variation pattern is set as a usage pattern. An effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the object effect may be set.

  In the above description, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the Z value of the pictogram image G3-1 that reports the first effect in the notification start order in the case of the notification number 3 is “3”, and the notification number is 2 or more. In the case where the Z value of the pictogram image G3-2 that reports the second effect in the notification start order is “2”, and the number of notifications is 1 or more, the pictogram image G3-3 that reports the third effect in the notification start order The Z value of the pictogram image G3-1 is “1”, the Z value of the pictogram image G3-2 is “2”, and the Z value of the pictogram image G3-3 is “1”. 3 ”. That is, when displaying a plurality of effect execution notification images, a new one may be displayed at a lower level (back side) instead of a new one at a higher level (front side).

  In the above description, the Z value setting range is 0 to 9 (or 0 to 10), but the Z value setting range is not limited to the above. Also, the Z value is not necessarily an integer.

  In the above description, the Z value of the step-up notice effect image is constant (Z value = 8) regardless of the number of steps (SU1 to SU5) (FIG. 27), but the Z value is varied depending on the number of steps. May be. For example, the Z value of SU1 to SU3 may be 8, and the Z value of SU4 and SU5 may be 7.5. In the above description, the display size of the step-up notice effect image is large (FIG. 27), but the display size may be varied depending on the number of steps. For example, the display sizes of SU1 to SU3 may be small, and the display sizes of SU4 and SU5 may be large.

  In addition, the chance zone effect may have a plurality of chance zones (low expectation zone, medium expectation zone, and high expectation zone) with different expectation levels, and if the Z value varies depending on the expectation level. It may be allowed. There may be a case where a transition is made from a low expectation zone to a medium expectation zone (or a high expectation zone), or a transition from a medium expectation zone to a high expectation zone. You may make it change Z value, when shifting to the chance zone of another expectation degree.

  FIG. 31B shows a scene in which all of the seven types of images shown in FIG. 27 together with the Z value are displayed at the same time, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not display all the seven types of images at the same time. May be. 50B shows a scene in which all of the four types of images shown in FIG. 49 together with the Z value are displayed at the same time, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not display all the four types of images at the same time. May be. FIG. 54B shows a scene in which all of the five types of images shown in FIG. 53 together with the Z value are displayed at the same time, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not display all the five types of images at the same time. May be. Note that not displaying at the same time does not execute effects or notifications (that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes only a part of the seven effects of FIG. 27A), or FIG. 54 and FIG. 54, only a part of the award ball number notification, the cumulative prize ball number notification, and the probability change confirmation notification is executed). The case where it cannot display simultaneously is included because the timing is different. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not display the predetermined effect image shown in FIG. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to execute the predetermined effect process shown in FIG.

  Also, the seven types of images shown in FIG. 27 all have different Z values, but at least some of the images may have the same Z value. The same applies to the images in FIGS. 49 and 53. When images with the same Z value are displayed, they may not overlap each other. For example, when the image A having a certain Z value is displayed, the image B having the same Z value as the image A may not be displayed. Further, the display start timing of the image B may be delayed until the display end timing of the image A. Further, when displaying the image B, the image A may be hidden (that is, the display end timing of the image A may be advanced). Further, for example, by changing the display position and display size of the image B (or by changing the display position and display size of the image A, or by changing the display position and display size of the image A and image B) Therefore, the image A and the image B may not be overlapped.

  In the above description, an example in which an error notification image is displayed when a magnetic abnormality occurs (see FIG. 27), but other errors (for example, an error based on opening of a glass door, an error based on detection of vibration) is described. An error notification image may be displayed when an error or the like based on the lower plate full is reached. The Z value may be varied depending on the type of error. For example, the error Z value based on the lower plate full may be a value between 3 and 4 (for example, 3.5), and the other error Z values may be 0.

  In FIG. 27B, the Z value of the decorative symbol is set to 9, but the Z value of the symbol (always small symbol) displayed on the image display device 5 separately from the decorative symbol is a value between 0 and 1 ( For example, 0.5 or the like may be set, or top priority (Z value = 0) may be set. Note that the small symbol does not necessarily represent the reach state (the state that all three symbols are displayed in a variable display, or the state that all three symbols are in a stopped display) It may be expressed in either of the states).

  In the above description, the Z value of the first effect execution notification image is 3, the Z value of the second effect execution notification image is 2, and the Z value of the third effect execution notification image is 1. The first Z value may be set to 1, and when the second is displayed, the first Z value may be changed from 1 to 2 and the second Z value may be set to 1. Further, when the third is displayed, the first Z value may be changed from 2 to 3, the second Z value may be changed from 1 to 2, and the third Z value may be set to 1.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, there are a plurality of display timings of the plurality of effect execution notification images, and the display order of the notification target effects is not constant. For example, in FIG. 44, the notification target effect (group notice) is displayed first, and in FIG. 45, the notification target effect (SU5) is displayed first. Although not shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45, the notification target effect (instant) may be displayed first.

  In the above description, the notification target effect of the effect execution notification is the step-up notice effect Step 5 (SU5), the group notice effect, and the accessory effect, but other effects (for example, the title notice effect and the next notice effect). , A mini character notice effect, a cut-in effect, etc.) may be used as the notification target effect of the effect execution notification. Further, the notification target effect may be one type, two types, or four or more types. You may display the mission completion display using a portable terminal (a mobile phone, a smart phone, etc.) etc. as an effect of an effect notification.

  Also, in FIG. 48, the relationship between the Z value of the predetermined effect image, the Z value of the decorative design being variably displayed, and the Z value of the decorative design being suspend displayed (predetermined effect image, decorative design being variably displayed, stop display The priority of the decorative pattern in the middle) has been described, but the relationship with an image other than the predetermined effect image may be the same. That is, in FIG. 48, the Z value of the decorative symbol during stop display <Z value of the predetermined effect image <Z value of the decorative symbol during variable display (priority of the decorative symbol during stop display> priority of the predetermined effect image> Although the priority order of decorative symbols during variable display is used, the same relationship may be applied to other effect images. As an example, the Z value of the decorative symbol during variable display may be set to 9 (similar to FIG. 48), and the Z value of the decorative symbol during stop display may be set to a value between 0 and 1 (for example, 0.5). . As a result, the decorative pattern (Z value = 9) during variable display is displayed on the back of the display image (Z value = 5) or the chance zone effect image (Z value = 7), for example, while being stopped. The decorative pattern in the middle (Z value = 0.5) is displayed in front of the display image such as the hold or the chance zone effect image. Further, the other effect images are not limited to those shown in FIG. 27 and the like, and are, for example, demo images, menu images, music selection images, music display images, right-handed notification images, left-handed back notification images, and the like. Also good. That is, it is possible to visually recognize the decorative pattern being stopped and displayed without being hindered by other effects. When the symbol stop command is received, the Z value of the decorative symbol is changed from 9 (first value) to 0.5 (second value) (for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in step S722). The Z value of the decorative design may be returned from 0.5 (second value) to 9 (first value) when the next variation pattern designation command is received. . As described with reference to FIG. 48 (E), the Z value of the decorative symbol is returned from 0.5 (second value) to 9 (first value) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the stop display. You may do it. The reason why the Z value of the decorative symbol during the stop display is set to a value between 0 and 1 is to set the priority of the decorative symbol during the stop display as the priority after the error notification image.

  In the predetermined effect operation control process of FIG. 48, the Z value of the predetermined effect image is changed depending on whether the decorative symbol is variably displayed or stopped. As in the case, the Z value of the predetermined effect image is fixed (for example, 8), and the Z value of the decorative pattern is changed (for example, the Z value during the variable display) depending on whether the variable display is being performed or stopped. = 9, Z value = 0.5 during stop display).

  In the above description, the Z value of the hold display and the Z value of the active display are the same, but the Z value of the hold display and the Z value of the active display may be different. For example, Z value of active display <Z value of hold display (priority of active display> priority of hold display) may be set. As an example, Z value of active display <Z value of super reach image <Z value of hold display (priority of active display> priority of super reach image> priority of hold display). Thereby, for example, during super reach, the hold display may not be visible, but the active display can be visually recognized. It should be noted that the Z value of a small design (production small design) displayed in a reduced form of the decorative design during super reach may be the same Z value as the active display, or the Z value between the active display and the super reach image. It may be a value.

  In the above description, the probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed when the probability variation big hit is confirmed based on the game ball having entered the specific area in the jackpot gaming state, but the probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed as an image of the probability variation promotion effect. You may make it do. Further, instead of or in addition to the probability change confirmation notification image, another image (for example, an image of a round number promotion effect, an image for notification of a gaming state) may be displayed. In addition, the image for informing about the gaming state includes, for example, an image for informing that the game is in an advantageous state (for example, an image for informing that the base is high, in addition to a probability variation confirmation notification image, a specific variation pattern table (for example, In addition, an image or the like for notifying that a variation pattern of a variation time shortened as time-shortening control is selected or is easily referred to is included.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, a high base state, a high-accuracy state, etc.) Determination means for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, processing for determining a special symbol display result in the special symbol normal processing (step S240), processing for determining the jackpot type (step S242), etc.) and the determination Determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before determination of means (for example, processing for determining whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination in the winning random number determination processing (step S406), a process for determining the type of jackpot (step S407) and the like, and an effect image (for example, various effect images shown in FIGS. 28, 29, 48, etc.) Effect execution means (for example, a chance zone effect operation control process in step S543, a step-up notice effect operation control process in step S544, etc.), and the effect execution means is based on the determination by the determination means. A first notice effect (for example, a step up notice effect or the like) using a first effect image (for example, a step up notice effect image or the like) as a notice effect to be executed, and a notice effect that is executed based on the determination by the determination means. As the second effect image (for example, the chance zone effect image or the like), a second notice effect (for example, the chance zone effect or the like) can be executed. The second effect image is displayed as an image in comparison with the first effect image. (For example, as shown in FIG. 30, a chance zone effect image with a Z value “7” has a Z value “8”). Is displayed on the front side than the step-up announcement attraction image).

  According to such a configuration, diversified effect images can be suitably displayed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, a high base state, a high accuracy state, etc.), Determination means for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, processing for determining a special symbol display result in the special symbol normal processing (step S240), processing for determining the jackpot type (step S242), etc.) and the determination Determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before determination of means (for example, processing for determining whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination in the winning random number determination processing (step S406), a process for determining the type of jackpot (step S407) and the like, and an effect image (for example, various effect images shown in FIGS. 28, 29, 48, etc.) Effect execution means (for example, a chance zone effect operation control process in step S543, a group notice effect operation control process in step S545, etc.), and the effect execution means is executed based on the determination by the determination means. The first notice effect (for example, group notice effect etc.) using the first effect image (for example, group notice effect image or the like) as the notice effect to be performed, and the second notice effect to be executed based on the determination by the determination means. A second notice effect (for example, a chance zone effect or the like) using an effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image or the like) can be executed, and the first effect image is compared with the second effect image for image display priority. (For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the group notice effect image with the Z value “6” is displayed in front of the chance zone effect image with the Z value “7”. ).

  According to such a configuration, diversified effect images can be suitably displayed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine that performs a game, and performs an effect using an effect image (for example, various effect images shown in FIGS. 28, 29, 48, etc.). Effect execution means (for example, group notice effect operation control process in step S545, accessory action control process in step S546, etc.), and the effect execution means is interlocked with the operation of the movable body (movable accessory 17 etc.). Linked images (for example, an effect effect image or the like) displayed using a linked image (for example, an effect effect image or the like) and an unlinked image (for example, an image that is displayed without being linked to the operation of the movable body). Non-linked effects (for example, group notice effects etc.) can be executed, and the linked images have a higher priority for image display than non-linked images (for example, As shown in FIG. , Character object effect effect image Z value "4" is displayed on the front side of the group announcement attraction image Z value "6").

  According to such a configuration, diversified effect images can be suitably displayed. In addition, although the interlocking image has been described as being displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body, the display start timing of the interlocking image and the operation start timing of the movable body do not necessarily coincide with each other. The display end timing and the operation end timing of the movable body do not necessarily match. In other words, an image having a display time that does not match the operation time of the movable body may be included in the interlocking image. For example, an image that is displayed before the start of the operation of the movable body and notifies the player that the movable body is operating, and an image that is displayed after the end of the operation of the movable body and gives the player the reverberation of the operation of the movable body are also linked images. included. In addition, the display content of the interlocking image may be display content that matches the shape or operation of the movable body (for example, the display content of the interlocking image shown in FIG. Although the combined circular effect image G4 is used, the display content of the interlocking image does not have to be the display content that matches the shape or operation of the movable body. In other words, an image having a display content that does not match the shape or operation of the movable body may be included in the interlocking image. For example, when the movable body is operated, if the image is related to the movement of the movable body (an image that predicts, complements, and emphasizes the movement of the movable body), the display content is irrelevant to the shape and movement of the movable body. Even images are included in linked images.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols), and stores variable display that has not yet started as pending information. Reservation storage means (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.) and the storage On hold display means for displaying a hold image corresponding to the hold information stored in the means (for example, display image for hold etc.) (for example, processing for adding hold display in winning effect determination processing (steps S162, S165), In the variable display start setting process, a process for digesting the hold display (step S531) and the like, and an effect image (for example, FIGS. 28, 29, and 4). Production execution means (for example, an accessory operation control process or the like in step S546) using the production execution means using various production images shown in FIG. 17 etc.) can be executed in conjunction with the linked image (for example, an effect effect effect image, etc.) displayed in conjunction with the movement of the action, etc., and the linked image is the reserved image. (For example, as shown in FIG. 30, an effect effect effect image with a Z value “4” is higher than a display image such as a hold with a Z value “5”, as shown in FIG. 30). (Displayed on the front side).

  According to such a configuration, diversified effect images can be suitably displayed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine that performs a game, and performs an effect using an effect image (for example, various effect images shown in FIGS. 28, 29, 48, etc.). Effect execution means (for example, group notice effect operation control process in step S545, chance zone effect operation control process in step S543, etc.), and the effect execution means is the first area (as shown in FIG. 27A). The first effect (for example, the chance zone effect or the like) using the first effect image (for example, the chance zone effect image or the like) and the second region (FIG. 27) wider than the first region. As shown in (A), a second effect (for example, a group notice effect or the like) using a second effect image (for example, a group notice effect image or the like) in the image size “large” region can be executed. 2 production images Is set higher in priority of image display than the first effect image (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, a group notice effect image with a Z value “6” is a chance zone with a Z value “7”). Displayed on the front side of the production image).

  According to such a configuration, diversified effect images can be suitably displayed. The second effect image only needs to be set higher in image display priority than the first effect image. The first effect image and the second effect image are the chance zone effect image and the group notice effect image. It is not limited. For example, as the first effect image (or second effect image), an error notification image, a display image such as a hold, an effect effect effect image, a step-up notice effect image, a predetermined effect image, a probability change confirmation notification image, a prize ball number notification An image, a cumulative prize ball number notification image may be displayed, and other images (a demo image, a menu image, a music selection image, a right-handed notification image, a left-handed back notification image, a promotion image, a small symbol image, etc.) The first effect image (or the second effect image) may be displayed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine that performs a game, and performs an effect using an effect image (for example, various effect images shown in FIGS. 28, 29, 48, etc.). Effect execution means (for example, a chance zone effect operation control process in step S543, a step-up notice effect operation control process in step S544, etc.), and the effect execution means is shown in the first area (FIG. 27A). In this way, a first effect (for example, a chance zone effect or the like) using a first effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image or the like) and a second area (see FIG. As shown in FIG. 27A, the second effect (for example, the step-up preview performance) using the second effect image (for example, the step-up notification effect image or the like) in the image size “large” region). Etc.), and the first effect image is set to have a higher priority of image display than the second effect image (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, a chance of Z value “7”). The zone effect image is displayed on the front side of the step-up notice effect image with the Z value “8”).

  According to such a configuration, diversified effect images can be suitably displayed. Note that the first effect image only needs to be set higher in image display priority than the second effect image. The first effect image and the second effect image are the chance zone effect image and the step-up notice effect image. It is not limited to. For example, as the first effect image (or second effect image), an error notification image, a display image such as a hold, an effect effect effect image, a step-up notice effect image, a predetermined effect image, a probability change confirmation notification image, a prize ball number notification An image, a cumulative prize ball number notification image may be displayed, and other images (a demo image, a menu image, a music selection image, a right-handed notification image, a left-handed back notification image, a promotion image, a small symbol image, etc.) The first effect image (or the second effect image) may be displayed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes notification means (for example, an error notification process in step S75) that performs notification using a notification image (for example, the various notification images shown in FIG. 28 and the like). The means can notify an error using an error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28), and the error notification image is set with a higher priority of image display than the effect image. (For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the error notification image with the Z value “0” is displayed on the front side of the accessory effect effect image with the Z value “4”, for example).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, the effect image can be suitably displayed without preventing error notification.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes notification means (for example, an effect execution notification operation control process in step S547) that performs notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28 and the like). The notification means indicates that the specific effect is executed when a specific effect (for example, step 5 (SU5) of step-up notice effect, group notice effect, accessory effect effect, etc.) is executed. For example, it is possible to notify using an effect execution notification image or the like, and the information image is set with a high priority (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the effect execution notification image has a Z value “1”). To “3”).

  According to such a structure, the visibility of an information image can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect executing means is a first interlocked image (for example, an effect effect effect image) that is displayed in conjunction with the operation of the first movable body (for example, the above-described movable body A). The first interlocking effect using a) and the second interlocking image (for example, the effect effect effect image b) displayed in conjunction with the operation of the second movable body (for example, the above-described movable body B) are used. The second interlocking effect can be executed, and the first interlocking image may have a different priority order than the second interlocking image (for example, as described above, the effect effect effect image a and the role Different Z values may be set for the object effect effect image b).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, the effect image according to the movable body can be suitably displayed with different priorities.

  The first interlocking image may be set to the same priority as the second interlocking image (for example, as described above, the same for the effect effect effect image a and the effect effect effect image b). Z value may be set).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, the effect image according to the movable body can be suitably displayed with the same priority.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable display means for performing variable display of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) (for example, a process for setting an effect control pattern corresponding to a variation pattern in a variable display start setting process as a use pattern ( Step S532) and a process of variably displaying decorative symbols based on the effect control pattern set in the effect process during variable display (step S542), etc., and the effect executing means is in a state where the game medium is easy to win ( For example, a predetermined effect image (for example, the predetermined effect image in FIG. 48B, etc.) as an effect to notify whether the variable winning device (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 6B) is controlled in the high base state or the like. A predetermined effect (for example, a predetermined effect executed in the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 46) can be executed, and the predetermined effect image The priority of image display is set higher than the identification information at least during a predetermined period during variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 48C, a predetermined effect image is displayed during variable display of decorative symbols. The image display priority is set lower than that of the identification information at least for a predetermined period during the stop display (for example, as shown in FIG. 48D). During the stop display of the symbol, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a lower layer than the decorative symbol).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, the predetermined effect image can be suitably displayed depending on whether the identification information is variably displayed or stopped.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 49, FIG. 53, etc.) to perform notification (for example, notification of the number of winning balls in step S573). Operation control processing, cumulative prize ball number notification operation control processing, etc. in step S574), and the notification means uses a first value notification image (for example, prize ball number notification image, etc.) for a specific period (a big hit each time). Game state, etc.) using a value (for example, the number of winning balls for the big hit) and a second value notification image (for example, cumulative prize ball number notification image) for a special period (for example, in a normal state). And the magnitude of the value acquired in the big hit gaming state etc. that have been continuously shifted without being) (for example, the cumulative number of winning balls in the big hit in the continuous chain), the first value notification image and Different from the second value notification image Priority is set that (for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (D), are set different Z value and the cumulative prize counts notification image for prize balls number notification image).

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with notification means (for example, an error notification process in step S75 or the like) that performs notification using notification images (for example, various notification images shown in FIGS. 28, 49, 53, etc.). , A prize ball number notification operation control process in step S573, a cumulative prize ball number notification operation control process in step S574, and the like, and the notification means includes an error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28). And the size of the value (for example, the number of prize balls) acquired using the value notification image (for example, the prize ball number notification image, the cumulative prize ball number notification image, etc.) can be notified. Different priority orders are set for the notification image and the value notification image (for example, as shown in FIG. 49D, the error notification image is different from the prize ball number notification image and the cumulative prize ball number notification image). Z value is set ).

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with notification means (for example, an error notification process in step S75 or the like) that performs notification using notification images (for example, various notification images shown in FIGS. 28, 49, 53, etc.). , Step S575 including a probability change confirmation notification operation control process), and the notification means uses an error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28) and an error and state notification image (for example, FIG. 53). The probability change confirmation notification image, the image for notification of becoming a high base, the image for notification that a specific variation pattern table is referred to, and the like (for example, the probability change state after the end of the big hit gaming state) And that the error notification image and the state notification image are set with different priorities. It may be those who are (e.g., as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the error notification image is set different Z value from the probability variation determined notification image).

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  The image display device 5 displays a small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol, but the small symbol image may be set higher in image display priority than the effect image. . For example, the image display priority may be set higher for the small symbol image compared to the error notification image (excluding an error notification image for notifying a serious error that causes a game stop).

  As described above, the embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the display mode of a hold display is made into three colors, white, yellow, and red (refer FIG. 35), the display mode of a hold display is not limited to this. For example, the above three colors (white, yellow, red) may be other three colors (for example, three colors of white, blue, and red, and three colors of gray, light blue, and purple) different from at least one color. Two colors or four or more colors may be used. Moreover, patterns, shapes, and sizes may be different. The same applies to the active display. The same effect can be obtained by such a configuration. Further, there may be a display mode dedicated to active display that is not displayed as the hold display. Thereby, interest is improved.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the display mode of the hold display is changed at the time of a shift, you may change the display mode of a hold display at another timing instead of or in addition at the time of a shift. For example, you may make it change during the variable display of a decoration symbol. The same applies to the active display. The same effect can be obtained by such a configuration. In addition, interest is improved.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although determined with the display mode of a hold display, and the display mode of an active display simultaneously (by one determination), you may determine separately. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the display mode of the hold display in each display position is determined collectively at the time of winning a prize, However, You may make it determine the display mode of the hold display after a shift every time it shifts. In the above embodiment, the display mode of active display is determined at the time of winning a prize. However, the display mode of active display may be determined when displaying in the active display area AHA. The same effect can be obtained by such a configuration.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, is the super reach (losing) (whether the fluctuation pattern is “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”) or the super reach (big hit) (the fluctuation pattern “PB4-X”)? Or “PB5-X”), the determination rate of whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect is varied (see FIG. 38A), but whether it is super reach α (the variation pattern “PA4-X”). ”Or“ PB4-X ”) or super-reach β (variation pattern“ PA5-X ”or“ PB5-X ”), the determination rate of whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect is different. It may be allowed. The same applies to the determination ratio of the step-up notice effect pattern and the decision ratio of the group notice effect. In addition, it can be suggested more strongly whether it becomes a big hit by changing the determination ratio depending on whether it is a super reach (losing) or a super reach (big hit). On the other hand, it is possible to more strongly suggest which superreach is to be achieved by changing the determination ratio depending on whether it is superreach α or superreach β.

  Further, in the above embodiment, whether or not to perform an effect such as a hold is determined according to a non-specific pattern (losing), a specific pattern (losing), a non-specific pattern (big hit), and a specific pattern (big hit). Instead of specific pattern (losing), specific pattern (losing), non-specific pattern (big hit), and specific pattern (big hit), whether or not an effect such as holding is executed depending on the variation category shown in FIG. You may decide. The same applies to the determination of an effect pattern such as hold. Note that in the aspect of determining whether or not to execute the hold or the like depending on the variation category, for example, the variation category shown in FIG. 20A is determined at the time of winning, and the variation category command corresponding to the determined variation category is determined. Can be sent.

  In the above embodiment, the step-up notice effect and the group notice effect are exemplified as the main notice effect, but other effects (for example, the title notice effect, the next notice effect, the mini character notice effect, the cut-in effect, etc.) May be. The same effect can be obtained by such a configuration.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the variation category determination table for the big hit (see FIGS. 20C and 20D) is common to the reserved storage numbers “0” to “4”. Similar to the table (see FIGS. 20A and 20B), etc., it may be divided by the number of reserved memories.

  In the above embodiment, when hold data (hold information) is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B, it is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. The reservation data is preferentially digested (see FIG. 18), but the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151S and the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B are held in order of winning order. The data may be digested. For example, a sorting device may be provided so that the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are alternately awarded to digest the pending data in the order of winning.

  In the above embodiment, the “ratio” is not limited to A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B: C = 70%: 20%: 10. (B), FIG. 38 (B), etc., A: B = 100%: 0% or A: B: C = 70%: 30%: 0 100% and 0% allocation)).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the number of rounds is two types of 8 rounds and 16 rounds, but the number of rounds may be three or more types. For example, there may be three types: 4R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, and 16R probability variation big hit. In the above embodiment, a gaming machine that provides only a probable big hit as the big hit type is shown, but a gaming machine that includes a non-probable big hit (normal big hit) as the big hit type may be used.

  In the above embodiment, a mode has been described in which a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating “0” to “9” and symbols indicating “−” are variably displayed and display results are derived and displayed. Is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the special symbol to be variably displayed may be different from the special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the fluctuating multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as variable display results, and among the fluctuating multiple types of special symbols, those that are not specially derived and displayed as variable display results May be included. In addition, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and a mode in which variable display is executed using only one type of special symbols may be used. As variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (turning on / off alternately may be repeated). That is, the repeated display of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. And even in this case, the one type of special symbol may be derived and displayed last (lit), or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be. The same applies to variable display of other symbols (for example, normal symbols, decorative symbols, etc.).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it is made to control to a big hit gaming state based on having displayed the big hit symbol on the 1st special symbol display 4A or the 2nd special symbol display 4B, it controls to a big hit gaming state. The mode to perform is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second start prize opening or in the second start prize opening, and the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the entry (passing) of the game ball into the specific area. You may stay.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., one change pattern designation command is used when starting change. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the change pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control board 12 may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the main board 11 stores a random value determination table (display result determination table, jackpot type determination table, and variation category determination table) and is extracted from the main board 11 at the time of starting winning. Based on the random number values (MR1 to MR3), the main board 11 refers to the random value determination table and determines the random value determination process (determination of whether or not to become a big hit, determination of the variation category, and big hit. In the example, the effect control board 12 receives the determination result determined in the main board 11 and executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. The execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the above-mentioned random number determination table is stored in the effect control board 12, and the random value itself is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (for example, an effect control command that can specify the random value from the main board 11). The effect control board 12 receives the random value itself extracted in the main board 11, and refers to the random value determination table based on the received random value. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random number determination process may be performed on the effect control board 12. Further, the random number determination process may be performed on both the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. For example, the effect control board 12 may receive a part of the random number values and execute the random number determination process, and may receive the determination result determined in the main board 11. Specifically, for example, the presentation control board 12 receives the random number values (MR1 and MR2), determines whether or not to win the jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, determines the type of jackpot and also determines the random value. You may make it receive the determination result of the fluctuation | variation category determined with the main board | substrate 11 based on (MR3). That is, the effect control board 12 can execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 11.

  In addition, the random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of the random numbers or changing the update range of the random numbers.

  In addition, for example, to a gaming machine that gives a game score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by recorded information on a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can be applied. In addition, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the gaming area.

  In the above description, it has been described that the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. It does not necessarily have to be stored in a table format (for example, including structures, arrays, etc.). That is, the determination values (determination values) to be compared with the extracted random number values may be stored together in the ROM 101, but may be stored in a distributed (scattered) manner at a plurality of locations in the ROM 101. Alternatively, a mathematical expression or a program that outputs a result (for example, a big hit or a loss in the example of FIG. 6) when the extracted random number value is input may be stored in the ROM 101. The same applies to the determination table stored in the ROM 121.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine as described above, and an effect (for example, a bonus or the like is established or not established) using an effect image (various images displayed on a liquid crystal screen included in the slot machine). Production execution means for executing various productions, etc., which are related to each other, and the production execution means uses a linked production using a linked image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body (movable body provided in the slot machine), A slot machine that can execute a non-linked effect using a non-linked image that is displayed without being linked to the operation of the movable body, and the linked image has a higher priority for image display than the non-linked image. It may be. Note that the non-linked image is an image displayed without being linked with the operation of the movable body. Accordingly, the non-linked image is an image having a higher appearance frequency or an image giving information having a lower importance level than the linked image. For example, a green image corresponding to a weak watermelon, a push order navigation image, and the like are examples of non-linked images. The interlocking image is an image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body. Therefore, the interlocking image is an image with a low appearance frequency or an image giving information with a high degree of importance as compared with the non-interlocking effect. For example, a red image corresponding to strong cherry, an image regarding addition, an image of “Aim for 7!”, A movie image at the time of freezing, etc. are examples of the interlocking image.

  For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine as described above, and an effect (for example, a bonus or the like is established or not established) using an effect image (various images displayed on a liquid crystal screen included in the slot machine). The effect execution means includes a first effect that uses the first effect image in the first region (for example, a weak watermelon response effect that uses a weak watermelon corresponding image, etc.). And a second effect that uses the second effect image in the second region that is wider than the first region (strong watermelon response effect using a strong watermelon compatible image, etc .. The image size of the strong watermelon compatible image is larger than the weak watermelon compatible image. The second effect image may be a slot machine in which the priority order of image display is set higher than that of the first effect image. Further, the first effect image may be a slot machine in which the priority of image display is set higher than that of the second effect image.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5HL ... 1st start prize memory display area 5HR ... 2nd start prize memory display area 5H ... Start prize Memory display area 6A ... Normal winning ball device 6B ... Normal variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8 ... Speaker 9 ... Lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 16 ... accessory control board 17 ... movable accessory 20 ... normal symbol display 21 ... gate switch 22A ... first start port switch 22B ... second start port switch 23 ... count switch 31A ... stick controller 31B ... push button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display controller 126 ... RTC circuit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine for playing games,
There is an effect execution means for executing the effect using the effect image,
The production execution means
Linked production using linked images displayed linked to the movement of the movable body,
It is possible to perform a non-linked production using a non-linked image that is displayed without being linked with the movement of the movable body,
A gaming machine characterized in that linked images have a higher priority for image display than non-linked images.